annual sewer investigation services for capital improvements projects division …€¦ · ·...

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Annual Sewer Investigation Services for Capital Improvements Projects

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01011 Summary of Work 01012 Contractor’s Use of Premises 01035 Change Order and Work Order Procedures 01040 Project Coordination 01070 Abbreviations and Symbols 01072 Reference Standards 01073 Definitions 01150 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 01311 Progress Schedule 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01564 Waste Material Disposal 01611 Storage of Materials 01789 Contract Close Out 01800 Special Project Provisions

DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK

02010 Erosion and Sediment Control 02110 Clearing, Grubbing and Site Restoration 02150 Bypass Pumping 02513 Pavement and Site Restoration 02651 Television Inspection 02652 Sewer Manhole Inspection 02653 Sewer Smoke Testing 02654 Sewer Dyed-Water Testing 02732 Multi-Sensor Inspections – CCTV, Laser, Sonar, H2S 02760 Cleaning of Sewers 02900 Landscaping

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

Not Used

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

Not Used

DIVISION 5 – METALS

Not Used

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS

Not Used

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Not Used DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS

Not Used

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

Not Used

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Not Used

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

Not Used

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

Not Used

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Not Used

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS

Not Used

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

Not Used

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

Not Used EXHIBITS

A Not Used B City of Richmond Health, Safety and Environment Management Plan

C Manhole Inspection Form D Smoke Testing Form E Dyed-Water Testing Form

End of Contents

Summary of Work 01011-1 4/2017

SECTION 01011

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY AND INTENT

A. This contract includes wide-ranging Annual Sewer Investigation Services for Capital Improvements Projects focused on inspection and cleaning of sanitary, combined, stormwater, and trunk sewer collection systems to support capital improvement planning and projects. The CONTRACTOR selected by the City will be responsible for providing sewer investigation services to support programmed capital projects and un-programmed, short-response projects.

B. The site conditions, specific locations, and estimated quantities of the various

projects are unknown at the time of bid. Quantities shown in the bid sheets are representative of the nature and character of anticipated projects. Quantities and unit prices bid are intended to provide a basis for low-bid evaluation of qualified bidders, and to make other evaluations necessary. No guarantee can be made as to the number, size or value, or type of scope of projects that may be assigned under this contract. Quantities shown in the bid sheets shall not be construed to represent the amount, mix, or combination of work to be done under the contract.

C. This Summary of Work and the Statement of Work provide an overall summary of

the responsibilities of the CONTRACTOR and its relation to the OWNER. They do not supersede the specific requirements of the other Contract Documents.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The Work may consist of but is not limited to providing all materials, equipment, labor and supervision for pipeline cleaning and CCTV; bypass pumping; manhole inspections; laser and sonar profiling; smoke testing; dye testing; and other related items included in the bid, complete with all other appurtenances and related work required to complete assigned projects.

B. Refer to Section 01800 (Special Project Provisions) for additional descriptions of

the Work and related requirements. 1.3 CONTRACTS

A. Other Contracts: 1. The City reserves the right to use other solicitations or contracts for the

procurement of these services at its sole discretion.


B. Assignment of Work – City Determination

1. The City reserves the right to make assignments at its sole discretion using

criteria such as cost; schedule; type, amount, and location of work assignments; ongoing number, size, and performance of work assignments; and other considerations applicable at the time of scope definition and assignment.

C. Assignment of Work - Process

1. Prior to assigning a project, and occasionally during construction, the City

may request prices from the CONTRACTOR(s) for related extra (or less) work. The CONTRACTOR(s) shall respond, in writing, with the requested information within ten (10) business days (two business days for urgent projects).

2. A proposed assignment will be provided to the CONTRACTOR(s) that will

detail the expected time for performance of the assignment, the list of unit price items and quantities that apply to the assignment, drawings showing the location of the proposed work, and other information regarding the scope and nature of the work. The proposed assignment will state the date that the final price for the proposed assignment is to be returned to the Construction Manager.

3. The CONTRACTOR may suggest improvements to the assignment in

writing no later than five (5) business days prior to the due date of the final price. This written request may include alternative bid items (including proposed equals) that will provide an improved product or lower cost. The CONTRACTOR may also request modifications to the stipulated time for performance of the assignment. The Construction Manager will provide the CONTRACTOR(s) with the City of Richmond’s decision on each request.

4. The total estimated price for the assignment will be calculated by applying

the CONTRACTOR’s contract unit prices to the estimated quantities contained in the proposed assignment.

5. The CONTRACTOR(s) shall assess the scope and nature of the work

contained within the assignment and may be requested to propose a deduction to the total estimated price based on the CONTRACTOR’s assessment of the proposed assignment (e.g., reduce laterals inspection unit cost for larger laterals inspection volumes). This deduction will be offered by the CONTRACTOR as a lump sum amount for the entire assignment.

6. A final price will be calculated by subtracting the offered deduction amount

from the total estimated price.


7. A CONTRACTOR(s) final price shall equal the total estimated price with

no deduction amount, should the CONTRACTOR fail to respond within the allotted time frame.

8. The detailed scope shown in an assignment is an estimate, and the

CONTRACTOR should be aware that the final actual scope is likely to change during the construction phase. Modifications may be required to the Contract Items used and the actual quantities may differ from the original estimate.

9. If the final actual value of an assignment is different than the original total estimated price of the assignment, the CONTRACTOR’s proposed lump sum deduction shall be prorated based on actual quantities delivered.

10. The lump sum deduction will be assessed on a prorated basis with each

partial payment for the assignment.

11. Liquidated damages in the amount specified in the Invitation for Bid will apply to each assigned project not completed within the agreed upon time.

12. If a CONTRACTOR fails to provide the number of crews submitted in

response to Invitation for Bids for an assigned work or fails to start performance of an assigned work within two (2) weeks of notification to proceed, such failure may be considered a breach of this Contract.

13. Once a job is authorized, the OWNER shall determine the required starting

date. If the CONTRACTOR has fewer crews working than stated in the bid, the CONTRACTOR may start jobs given to him prior to the required starting date as approved by the OWNER. This will in no way allow the CONTRACTOR to delay the required starting date of any job.

1.4 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Work by OWNER:

1. The City will provide and pay the cost of supporting power poles. 2. Adjustment of fire hydrants, gas or water lines determined to be in conflict

with the work.

3. Installation or relocation of traffic signal equipment, including in-pavement control loops.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION


(NO TEXT FOR THIS PAGE)

01012-1 9/2015

SECTION 01012

CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PREMISES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Rights-of-Way

1. CONTRACTOR shall confine access, operations and storage areas to rights-of-way provided by OWNER.

2. CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements, at no additional

cost to the OWNER, for temporary use of private properties, in which case CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR’s surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the OWNER against claims or demands arising from such use of properties outside of rights-of-way.

3. Restrict total length which materials may be distributed along the route of

the construction at any one time to 1,000 linear feet unless otherwise approved in writing by the OWNER.

B. Properties outside of Rights-of-Way

1. Permanent altering of properties adjacent to and along rights-of-way will not be permitted.

2. Any damage to properties outside of rights-of-way shall be repaired or

replaced to the satisfaction of the OWNER at no additional cost to the OWNER.

C. Use of Site

1. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on and off premises.

2. CONTRACTOR shall move stored products that interfere with the

operations of OWNER or another CONTRACTOR.

3. CONTRACTOR shall obtain approvals of governing authorities prior to impeding or closing public roads or streets. Do not close more than two consecutive intersections at one time.

01012-2 9/2015

4. Notify the OWNER 48 hours prior to closing a street or a street crossing. Permits for street closures are required in advance and are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

5. Notify the OWNER immediately prior to closing a street or a street crossing

during emergency work

6. Maintain access for emergency vehicles including access to fire hydrants.

7. Avoid obstructing drainage ditches or inlets; when obstruction is unavoidable due to requirements of the Work, provide grading and temporary drainage structures to maintain unimpeded flow.

8. Perform daily clean up of dirt, debris, scrap materials and other disposable

items inside and outside the construction zone. Keep streets, driveways, and sidewalks clean of dirt, debris and scrap materials. Do not leave buildings, roads, streets or other project areas unclean overnight. Any costs incurred by the OWNER due to the CONTRACTOR’s failure to clean up the site will be deducted from the CONTRACTOR’s final invoice and a penalty of $100 per indecent shall be assessed to the CONTRACTOR.

9. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all additional storage or work

areas required for CONTRACTOR’S operations.

D. Notification to Property Owners and Adjacent Occupants

1. Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the Work of the proposed construction and time schedule. Notification shall be not less than 48 hours or more than 2 weeks prior to work being performed within 100 feet of the homes or businesses. All public notification activities shall be coordinated through OWNER personnel. The OWNER will provide a sample door hanger showing form and content to be followed. Notification shall include the date and time Work is scheduled to begin, and the date and time Work is scheduled to be completed. Notification shall also include contact information for the CONTRACTOR. Notification/door hanger shall be submitted to the OWNER for review and approval. CONTRACTOR shall place the notification/door hanger approved by the OWNER on the affected properties.

2. Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the emergency Work immediately after coordinating plan of action. Continue to update individual occupants as emergency plans change and work progresses. All public notification activities shall be coordinated through OWNER personnel performed by the CONTRACTOR as specified in D.1.

01012-3 9/2015

E. Public, Temporary, and Construction Roads and Ramps

1. Construct and maintain temporary detours to provide for normal public traffic flow when use of public roads or streets is closed by necessities of the Work.

2. Provide mats or other means to prevent overloading or damage to existing

roadways from tracked equipment or exceptionally large or heavy trucks or equipment.

F. Excavation in Streets and Driveways

1. Avoid hindering or needlessly inconveniencing public travel on a street or any intersecting alley or street for more than two blocks at any one time, except by permission of the OWNER.

2. Obtain the OWNER’s approval when the nature of the Work requires

closing of an entire street. Permits required for street closure are the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. Avoid unnecessary inconvenience to abutting property owners.

3. Remove surplus materials and debris and open each block for public use as

work in that block is complete.

4. Avoid obstructing driveways or entrances to private property.

5. Provide temporary crossing or complete the excavation and backfill in one continuous operation to minimize the duration of obstruction when excavation is required across drives or entrances.

G. Maintenance and Protection of Traffic

1. Public Roadways:

a. The CONTRACTOR must maintain traffic control as it is described in the latest edition of the City of Richmond’s Work Area Traffic Control Handbooks, Volumes I and II, VDOT regulations, the General Conditions, Special Provisions and as described herein. Where an apparent conflict occurs between the handbooks, the General Conditions, Special Provisions and the requirements of this Section, the handbooks govern. The handbooks are available at the Bureau of Traffic Engineering, 900 East Broad Street, Richmond, Virginia 23219 and VDOT.

b. Submit a Traffic Control Plan to the OWNER prior to work.

01012-4 9/2015

c. When required to cross, obstruct or temporarily close a street or trafficway, CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain suitable bridges, detours or other temporary means for the accommodation of traffic as required by the latest edition of the City of Richmond Traffic Control Handbooks and the latest edition of the City of Richmond Department of Public Works Policy for Temporary Steel Plate Bridging for General Utility Street Work. CONTRACTOR shall furnish steel plates and cold mix for such work. Closings shall be for the shortest time practical, and passage shall be restored immediately after completion of backfill and temporary paving or bridging.

d. CONTRACTOR shall give the required advance notice of proposed

operations to the fire and police departments.

e. CONTRACTOR shall give reasonable notice to owners or tenants of private property who may be affected by the operations. All public notification activities shall be coordinated through OWNER’s personnel and performed by the CONTRACTOR as specified in D.1.

f. CONTRACTOR shall provide signs, signals, barricades, flares, lights

and all other equipment, service and personnel required to regulate and protect all traffic, and warn of hazards. All such work shall conform to requirements of the OWNER. Coordinate activities with the OWNER. Remove temporary equipment and facilities when no longer required; restore grounds to original, or to specified conditions.

g. CONTRACTOR shall maintain at all times a 10-foot-wide all-

weather lane adjacent to work areas which shall be kept free of construction equipment and debris and shall be for the use of emergency vehicles, or as otherwise provided in the traffic control plan.

h. CONTRACTOR shall not obstruct the normal flow of traffic from 7

a.m. to 9 a.m. and 4 p.m. to 6 p.m. on designated major roadways unless directed by the OWNER.

i. CONTRACTOR shall keep streets used for entering or leaving the

job area free of excavated material, debris, and any foreign material resulting from construction operations.

2. Residential Entrances:

a. CONTRACTOR shall maintain local driveway access to residential and commercial properties adjacent to work areas at all times or as directed by the OWNER.

01012-5 9/2015

3. Traffic Signals and Signs:

a. Provide and operate traffic control and directional signals required to direct and maintain an orderly flow of traffic in all areas under CONTRACTOR's control, or affected by CONTRACTOR's operations. All such work shall conform to the requirements in the Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) Standards.

b. Provide traffic control and directional signs, mounted on barricades or

standard posts:

(1) At each change of direction of a roadway and at each crossroad.

(2) At detours and hazardous areas. (3) At parking areas.

4. Flagpersons:

a. Provide certified and suitably equipped flagpersons when construction operations encroach on traffic lanes, as required for regulation of traffic and in accordance with the requirements of the OWNER.

b. Where a railroad flagperson is required, it is the CONTRACTOR’s

responsibility to coordinate with the applicable railroad. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the payment for railroad flagperson directly with the applicable railroad agency (such as Norfolk Southern, CSX etc.) and submit the receipt for the incurred expenditures, plus a 10% mark-up, to the OWNER for reimbursement.

5. Flares and Lights:

a. Provide flares and lights during periods of low visibility:

(1) To clearly delineate traffic lanes, to guide traffic and to warn of hazardous areas.

(2) For use by flagpersons in directing traffic.

b. Provide illumination of critical traffic and parking areas.

6. Parking Control:

a. Control all CONTRACTOR related vehicular parking within the limits of the Work to preclude interference with public traffic or

01012-6 9/2015

parking, access by emergency vehicles, OWNER’s operations, or construction operations. CONTRACTOR related vehicular parking not to be within median strips unless approved by the OWNER. CONTRACTOR related vehicular parking within median strips shall be allowed when the Work is within the median strip. Provide temporary parking facilities for the public as may be required because of construction or operations.

b. Monitor parking of all construction and private vehicles:

(1) Maintain free vehicular access to and through parking areas. (2) Prohibit parking on or adjacent to access roads, or in non-

designated areas.

7. Site Control:

a. CONTRACTOR personnel to remain at all times at open project site. This includes, but is not limited to all break times.

H. Site Restoration

1. Provide site restoration as specified in Section 02110 - Clearing, Grubbing and Site Restoration.

I. City Water

1. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain water required for cleaning by connection to City fire hydrants, provided the connection is made in accordance with City requirements. Provide notice to City Agencies prior to withdrawing water from the hydrants. Connect to only yellow topped fire hydrants and not silver hydrants. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain a portable water meter from the City’s Department of Public Utilities and attach a RPZ backflow preventer to the meter in accordance with City standards. A $500.00 deposit for the meter is paid to the City’s Department of Public Utilities. The contractor will pay the Department of Public Utilities for water usage at established rates. Contact the City’s Department of Public Utilities, Special Billing department (804 646-5270) for current water rates. Support meter and backflow preventer so as to not damage hydrants. Be responsible for any damage resulting from improper operation of hydrants. Do not use or obstruct a fire hydrant when there is a fire in the area. Remove water meters, fittings, and piping from fire hydrants at the end of each working day.

01012-7 9/2015

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

01012-8 9/2015


01035-1 9/2015

SECTION 01035

CHANGE ORDER AND WORK ORDER PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Definitions

B. Change Orders

C. Work Orders 1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Change Order: A document which is signed by the CONTRACTOR and OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the effective Date of the Agreement.

B. Work Order: Work Order is a written directive to the CONTRACTOR issued on or

after the effective date of the agreement; signed by the OWNER, ordering Work to be completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.3 CHANGE ORDERS

A. Initiation of Proposals:

1. From time to time, the OWNER may issue a Request for a Change Order Proposal. The Request will contain a description of the intended change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications as applicable, and the projected time for accomplishing the change.

2. The CONTRACTOR may propose a change in the Work by submittal of a

Change Order Request to the OWNER describing the proposed change with a statement of the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract time and price, along with supporting documentation.

B. Execution of Change Order Proposal:

1. When a Proposal is requested for changed work, submit proposal within 14

days following receipt of the Request from OWNER. State the increase or decrease, if any, in Contract Completion Time and Contract Price.

01035-2 9/2015

2. Explain proposal in sufficient detail to permit review by OWNER.

3. For Omitted Work the decrease in the Contract Price will be determined by the OWNER and will include appropriate amounts for profit and overhead.

4. The OWNER will review the Proposal and may request additional information

and documentation. Provide these items upon request.

5. If the OWNER decides to proceed with the change, the OWNER will issue a Change Order for signature first by the CONTRACTOR and then by the OWNER.

6. The CONTRACTOR will promptly complete the approved change in the Work

on receipt of the executed Change Order.

a. Failure to sign the Change Order does not relieve the CONTRACTOR from performing the Work if the Change Order is signed by the OWNER.

C. Compute the cost of both additive and deductive changes in the Work in accordance

with these specifications and as follows:

1. Include, the costs of labor, crew foreman and general foreman performing or directly supervising the changed Work on the site. Include travel and subsistence, but only to the extent incurred.

2. To the labor cost add all net premium for Workman's Compensation, taxes

pursuant to the Federal Social Security Act, and payments required under State and Federal unemployment laws.

3. Include rent for plant and equipment at unit rental costs for similar rentals from

an independent firm (i.e. a firm which is not owned in whole or in part by the CONTRACTOR). If equipment is owned by CONTRACTOR or rented from a firm in which the CONTRACTOR has an interest, calculate the rent in accordance with the applicable provisions and terms of the current edition of RS Means and Equipment Watch as determined by the OWNER.

1.4 WORK ORDERS

A. Estimate: OWNER will require an estimate of cost and project schedule for repairs and replacement work prior to issuance of a Work Order.

B. Initiation by OWNER: OWNER may issue a Work Order with a Notice to Proceed

without a prior Request for a Change Order Proposal or the CONTRACTOR's signature.

01035-3 9/2015

C. CONTRACTOR to notify and coordinate with OWNER on all project work schedules on a daily basis.

D. Payment Determination: The OWNER will designate the method of determining the

amount of compensation or credit, if any, based on one of the methods contained in these specifications.

E. Timing: Proceed with the change in the Work immediately upon receipt of the Work

Order.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

01035-4 9/2015


01040-1 9/2015

SECTION 01040

PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. As more fully set forth in the General Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for coordination of all of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, direct and cooperate fully with all Subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, distributors, installers, testing agencies and all others whose services, materials or equipment are required to ensure completion of the Work within the Contract Time. A CONTRACTOR representative shall be at the work site if a Subcontractor is providing the Work.

B. CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with and coordinate its Work with the work of

any other CONTRACTOR, utility service company or OWNER’s employees performing additional work related to the Project at the site.

1. The CONTRACTOR must notify the proper City agency at least 48 hours

prior to the time set for work involving their facilities or equipment.

a. Department of Public Utilities: Actual adjustment of fire hydrants, gas or water lines will be made by personnel of this Department. The CONTRACTOR will only be required to uncover the lines and properly backfill them.

C. CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for damage done by others not under his

jurisdiction.

D. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate its Work with the work of others to assure compliance with schedules.

E. CONTRACTOR shall attend and participate in all project meetings and report on

the progress of all Work and compliance with schedules.

1.2 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE

A. The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER 1. The OWNER intends to use a third-party Construction Manager (CM) to act

as the OWNER's agent during the construction of the project. The successful bidder will receive instructions from the OWNER clarifying the specific duties between the Engineer and Construction Manager, specifying

01040-2 9/2015

among other matters the channels of communication to be used by the CONTRACTOR.

2. Where portions of the specification indicates “ENGINEER” or “OWNER” or “CITY” relative to coordination and administration of construction contracts on behalf of the OWNER, inspection of the Work, coordination of third-party testing services contracts procured by the OWNER, construction administration, and providing other construction management services on behalf of the OWNER, these terms shall be considered interchangeable with CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

PART 2 PRODUCT

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

01070-1 9/2015

SECTION 01070

ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 ABBREVIATIONS

A. Common abbreviations which may be found in the Specifications are:

alternating current a-c Fahrenheit F ante meridiem am feet ft ampere A feet per hour fph average avg feet per minute fpm feet per second fps biochemical oxygen BOD figure Fig demand flange flg brake horsepower bhp foot-pound ft-lb British thermal unit Btu gallon gal Centigrade C gallons per minute gpm company Co gallons per second gps cubic inch cu in gram g cubic foot cu ft cubic yard cy Hertz Hz cubic feet per minute cfm hour hr cubic feet per second cfs horsepower hp decibel db inch in. degree Centigrade (or Celsius) (say)

20 C inch-pound in.-lb inside diameter id

degree Fahrenheit (say) 68 F kilovolt-ampere kva diameter diam kilowatt kw direct current d-c kilowatt-hour kwhr dollars $ linear foot lf each ea liter l efficiency eff maximum max revolutions per

minute rpm

mercury Hg milligram mg

01070-2 9/2015

milligrams per liter mg/l second sec milliliter ml specific gravity sp gr millimeter mm square sq million gallon mil square foot sq ft million gallons per day

mgd square inch sq in square yard sy

minimum min standard std standard cubic feet

per minute scfm

net positive suction head

npsh total dynamic head tdh totally-enclosed-

fan-cooled tefc

number No. National Pipe Threads NPT ounce oz volt v outside diameter od vertical foot vf parts per million ppm post meridiem pm pound lb pounds per square foot psf pounds per square inch psi pounds per square inch absolute

psia

pounds per square inch gage

psig

1.2 ORGANIZATION ABBREVIATIONS

A. Abbreviations of organizations which may be used in these Specifications are:

ACS American Chemical Society ACI American Concrete Institute AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AIChE American Institute of Chemical Engineers ANSI American National Standards Institute APHA American Public Health Association ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers AWWA American Water Works Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute EPA Environmental Protection Agency FM Factory Mutual HEW Department of Health, Education and Welfare

01070-3 9/2015

HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development ISO Insurance Services Office NFPA National Fire Protection Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation PCI Precast Concrete Institute UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. USGS United States Geological Survey USPHS United States Public Health Service VDOT Virginia Department of Public Transportation VOSH Virginia Occupational Safety and Health WWEMA Water and Wastewater Equipment Manufacturers Association

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

01070-4 9/2015


01072-1 9/2015

SECTION 01072

REFERENCE STANDARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. When a reference standard is specified, comply with requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when they are modified by the Contract Documents, or when applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or codes establish stricter standards. The latest provisions of applicable standards shall apply to the Work, unless otherwise specified. Reference standards include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.

2. American Concrete Institute.

3. American Gear Manufacturers Association.

4. American National Standards Institute.

5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

6. American Society for Testing and Materials.

7. American Water Works Association.

8. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.

9. Factory Mutual Association.

10. Virginia Occupational Safety and Health.

11. National Fire Protection Association.

12. Prestressed Concrete Institute.

13. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

14. City of Richmond Department of Public Utilities, Sanitary Sewer System

Design Guidelines and Standard Specifications and Details

15. City of Richmond Department of Public Works, Standards Manual

01072-2 9/2015

16. All other applicable standards listed in the Specifications, and the standards

of utility service companies, where applicable.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

01073-1 9/2015

SECTION 01073

DEFINITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. As used in these specifications, the following terms shall have these assigned meanings.

1. Class of Excavation: The purpose for which the excavation is made. 2. Type of Excavation or Material: The nature of material excavated or used.

3. CONTRACTOR: The person, firm or corporation which has entered into a

contract with the OWNER to do work for the OWNER in accordance with these specifications.

4. Engineer: The authorized representative for the Director of the Department

of Public Utilities (OWNER) in charge of supervising the work. The term can be used interchangeably with CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

5. Trench: A trench shall be defined as a narrow excavation (in relation to its

depth) made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench (measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet.

6. Main Trench: A trench generally parallel to the property lines in which the

sewer lines and accessories are installed. This also includes excavation for tie-ins.

7. Service Trench: A trench generally perpendicular to the property lines in

which sewer laterals are installed.

8. Trench Excavation: Excavation of main or service trenches.

9. Common Excavation: All excavation not described as trench excavation.

10. Earth Excavation: All excavation not described as hardpan or rock excavation.

11. Hardpan Excavation: The excavation of indurated clay, shale or sand like

material.

01073-2 9/2015

12. Rock Excavation: The excavation of solid rock, any single stone or concrete mass having a volume of two cubic feet or more.

13. Heavy Paving: Heavy paving shall include concrete, asphalt, spall, brick or

penetration paving. Heavy paving shall be measured from the surface to the bottom where thickness is four inches or more. Any other paving shall be classed earth excavation. Patch paving shall be excavated so that the center line of the excavated trench is less than six feet long. Each such patch shall be classed the same as the surrounding surface.

14. Select Backfill Material: Any backfill material, other than excavated

material, that is ordered to be placed in the excavated area by the OWNER.

15. Special Pipe Bedding: Any backfill material needed to supplement existing sub-standard material which the pipe must rest on to bring the trench to the established grade.

16. Regrading Excavation: Trench excavation of greater depth than is shown on

the plans and profiles which are ordered by the OWNER after the trench has been cut to the established grade.

17. Lowering Excavation: Excavation made to permit the lowering of any

sewer lines or accessories. Example: when a new trench is excavated and the pipe has been installed without backfill, any excavation required to lower this line will be classified as lowering excavation.

18. Trenchless Excavation: Trench excavation made without removing the

surface for a distance of more than four feet. Where trenchless excavation is four feet or less in length, the excavation shall be classified as if had the trench been opened to the surface.

19. Test Hole Excavation: Excavation made at the direction of the engineer to

determine the location of existing underground structures or for any purpose related to the work.

20. Hand Excavation: Excavation that is made with hand tools rather than by

excavation machines.

21. Force Account: Any work ordered to be done or cost to the CONTRACTOR which is ordered by the OWNER and in the opinion of the OWNER, is not covered by the unit price pay items, as listed in the Price Schedule and is to be billed for at cost of labor, materials and equipment, insurance, taxes, etc., plus an agreed percentage for overhead and profit.

01073-3 9/2015

22. Mechanical Joint Pipe: Cast or ductile iron pipe and accessories of which the joints are made by a gasket pressed into a bell by a follower ring and bolts.

23. Bell and Spigot Pipe: Cast or ductile iron pipe and accessories of which the

joints are made by driving packing and poured lead. These joints are then thoroughly caulked.

24. Compression Ring Pipe/Push-on: Pipe and accessories of which the joints

are made by drawing the joint together by mechanical means, thus compressing a rubber ring into a suitable groove.

25. Welded Pipe: Coated steel pipe and accessories of which the pipe ends are

welded together.

26. HDPE Pipe: High Density Polyethylene pipe and fittings which are joined by a heat fusion process.

27. Accessories: All valves, couplings, fittings, box culverts, etc., other than

pipe that are a part of sewer systems.

28. Bell Joint Clamp: A device applied to the bell, of bell and spigot pipe, to supplement the existing joint assembly.

29. Caulking Joints: Making a standard lead joint with materials in a pipe

system contracted for as a mechanical joint or compression ring system.

30. Established Grade: The established grade is the elevation at the bottom of the proposed excavation. The established grade as shown on the profiles may be changed by the engineer when deemed appropriate. The engineer shall determine the established grade, for other than main trench excavations, when not shown on the profiles.

31. Approved, Authorized, Directed, Ordered, Required: When the above

words are used in these specifications without further definition the words “by the OWNER” shall be implied.

32. Point Repair: Repair of broken or collapsed gravity sanitary sewer lines on

public property, including mains, collectors, and service lines, by replacing at the point of failure, the length of failed pipe with new pipe.

33. Obstruction Removal: Clearing the sewer main of obstructions to allow for

rehabilitation.

34. Sewer Lines: Gravity flow pipe lines in the easement or right-of -way which collect sanitary sewer discharges from commercial or residential

01073-4 9/2015

service lines and discharge into another sewer line (main or collector), lift station, or treatment plant.

35. Service Lines: Those gravity flow sewer lines from commercial or

residential property which discharge into a sewer line.

36. Special Provisions: Special Provisions are additional instructions or specifications and if in conflict with these General Specifications then the requirements of the Special Provisions shall apply.

37. Fittings, pipe: Bends, elbows, couplings, crosses, reducers, tees, unions,

etc., which are connectors and are used in a piping system to join branch lines, service laterals, and main trunk lines.

38. Borrow: Fill materials used in backfilling of excavations. Fill materials are

select fill, common fill, 57 or 21A stone, or other specified materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

Measurement and Payment 01150-1 5/2017

SECTION 01150

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The items listed below beginning with Paragraph 1.8, refer to and are the same pay items listed in the Price Schedule. They constitute all of the pay items for the completion of the Work. No direct or separate payment will be made for providing miscellaneous temporary or accessory Works, plant, services, CONTRACTOR's field office, layout surveys, job signs, sanitary requirements, testing, safety devices, approval and record drawings, water supplies, power, maintaining traffic, removal of waste, watchmen, flagmen, bonds, insurance, and all other requirements of the General Conditions. Compensation for all such services, equipment and materials shall be included in the prices stipulated for the unit price pay items listed herein.

B. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each separately identified item.

C. Overhead is defined in Section 01035 – Change Order and Work Order Procedures.

1.2 UNIT PRICE PAY ITEMS

A. The Estimated Number of Bid Units for Contract Items, as listed in the Price Schedule, are approximate only and are included solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids. The OWNER does not expressly or by implication agree that the nature of materials encountered below the surface of the ground or the actual quantities of material encountered or required will correspond therewith and reserves the right to decrease any quantity or eliminate any quantity as the OWNER may deem necessary. Except as provided in Paragraph 1.3, CONTRACTOR or the OWNER will not be entitled to any adjustment in a unit bid price as a result of any change in an estimated quantity and agrees to accept the aforesaid unit bid prices as complete and total compensation for any additions caused by changes or alterations in the Work ordered by the OWNER.

B. Additional Bid and Force Account Items:

1. General - Work not covered by Contract Items necessary for the completion of the contract may be considered as extra Work and will be paid for under terms of Additional Bid and Force Account Items or by change order procedure described in Section 01035 – Change Order and Work Order Procedures for items not listed in the Additional Bid and Force Account Items.


2. The amount to be paid to the CONTRACTOR for Work done under force account shall be the sum of the component costs of such Work, directly chargeable thereto, as defined hereunder in the numbered paragraphs 1.2, B.3.a. to B.3.f., inclusive.

3. The amount paid to the CONTRACTOR as provided in the preceding paragraphs shall be understood to include full compensation for any and all expenses incurred by the CONTRACTOR and his subcontractors in connection with the force account Work. The aforementioned component costs shall be as follows:

a. The cost of labor, including foremen, for the time actually engaged on site on the force account Work. CONTRACTOR’s workers will be compensated at the rate of their duty performed (i.e. - A foreman working as an operator would be compensated by the OWNER as an operator.)

b. The cost of materials furnished, other than those, if any, furnished by the OWNER, incorporated into, or necessarily used in the prosecution of, the force account Work, less the salvage value of any materials salvaged upon completion of such Work.

c. The cost of the use of equipment on the force account Work, will be calculated at the additional bid item rates. If the equipment that is included in the Force Account Items list is rented by the CONTRACTOR, the cost of the equipment shall be calculated at the additional bid item rates. If, however, equipment of unwarranted size or type is rented which is not included in the Force Account Items list, the amount to be paid to the CONTRACTOR shall be the rental cost plus a 10% mark-up on the costs. CONTRACTOR shall submit the receipt for the rental cost to the OWNER for reimbursement.

4. An amount equal to a percentage of the costs determined as set forth above under numbered paragraphs 1.2, B.3.a. to B.3.c., inclusive, which amount shall be considered full compensation for profit, tools, plant, depreciation, overhead, superintendence, and the costs of the bond for faithful performance and of the bond for materials and labor. The percentages shall be as follows:

a. For force account Work done by the CONTRACTOR, the amount to be paid shall be the sum of the costs and amounts determined as set forth under the hereinbefore numbered paragraph 1.2, B.3.a. to B.3.c., inclusive, plus a percentage agreed to on the bid form, not to exceed 15 percent thereof.

b. For force account Work done by a subcontractor, the amount to be paid to the CONTRACTOR shall be the sum of the costs and amounts determined as set forth hereinbefore in numbered paragraphs 1.2, B.3.a. to B.3.c., inclusive, plus a percentage agreed to on the bid form, not to exceed 25 percent thereof.

c. The amounts paid in compliance with the United States Social Security Act, and for Workmen’s Compensation Insurance.


d. The amounts paid in compliance with the Commonwealth of Virginia Retail Sales Act.

C. OWNER May Furnish Materials. – The OWNER reserves the right to furnish such materials as it may deem expedient, and no allowance will be made for profit thereon.

D. Recording, Billing, and Certifying of Charges. – All force account charges shall be recorded daily upon report sheets prepared by the CONTRACTOR, furnished to the OWNER, and signed by both parties, which daily reports shall thereafter be considered the true record of the force account Work done. All bills for force account Work shall be presented at the time progress estimates are being made, and shall be accompanied by the original receipted bills for materials, equipment rental, and copies of payrolls bearing the CONTRACTOR’s signed certification as to the truth and accuracy of such copies.

1.3 RELATED PROVISIONS

A. Payments to CONTRACTOR: Refer to General Conditions and Agreement.

B. Changes in Contract Price: Refer to General Conditions and Section 01035 – Change Order and Work Order Procedures.

1.4 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT

A. The CONTRACTOR shall remove and replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the Contract Documents.

B. If, in the opinion of the OWNER, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the OWNER will direct one of the following remedies:

C. The nonconforming Work will remain as is, but the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the OWNER.

D. The nonconforming Work will be modified as authorized by the OWNER, and the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the OWNER, if the modified Work is deemed to be less suitable than originally specified.

E. The authority of the OWNER to assess the nonconforming Work and identify payment adjustment is final.

1.5 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS

A. Payment will not be made for any of the following:

1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable to the OWNER.

2. Products determined as nonconforming before or after placement.


3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle.

4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work.

5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work, unless specified otherwise.

6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products.

B. Submit a form with 'Receipt' in the title and showing required items to the OWNER'S Construction Inspector for review and approval. Once the receipt is approved by the Inspector, the CONTRACTOR will be notified and provided with a purchase order number for the corresponding 'Invoice' by the OWNER. CONTRACTOR must include the purchase order number on the 'Invoice' and submit to the OWNER'S Accounts Payable for process of payment.

C. Submit 'Receipt' to the OWNER on, or before the 30th of each month.

1.6 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT ITEMS

A. Contract Items A-1 through A-16 – Light Sewer Cleaning

1. Description: This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization and demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services to provide light sewer cleaning; traffic control; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; removal and disposal of debris; transportation and disposal fees; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02760. Payment for raising frames and covers shall be paid under separate bid items. The City will provide a dump site at the WWTP for sanitary debris at no cost to the CONTRACTOR.

2. Measurement for Payment: Measurement shall be from centerline of manhole to centerline of manhole along the centerline of the pipeline to the nearest linear foot (LF). Diameters shall be measured for payment in inches to the nearest diameter bid (or calculated equivalent diameter for noncircular pipes).

3. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit prices for actual quantities measured and accepted.

B. Contract Items A-17 through A-32 – Heavy Sewer Cleaning

1. Description: This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization and demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services to provide heavy sewer cleaning; traffic control; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; removal and disposal of debris; transportation and disposal fees; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02760. Payment for raising frames and covers shall


be paid under separate bid items. The City will provide a dump site at the WWTP for sanitary debris at no cost to the CONTRACTOR.



C. Contract Items A-33 through A-48 – CCTV Inspection

1. Description: This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization and demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services to provide closed circuit television (CCTV); traffic control; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; locating and aboveground marking of buried or paved over manholes, cave-in and other pipe features; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02651. Payment for raising frames and covers shall be paid under separate bid items. The City will provide a dump site at the WWTP for sanitary debris at no cost to the CONTRACTOR.



D. Contract Item A-49 to A-59 – CCTV Inspection with 2D Laser Profile

1. Description: This item applies to investigation of sewer pipes to determine the condition, dimensions, and shape of sewer pipes. This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization and demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services; traffic control; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; field data collection of CCTV videos and 2D laser profiles; data processing and reporting; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02732. Any required pipe cleaning, manhole modifications for access, or raising frames and covers will be paid under separate pay items.

2. Measurement for Payment: Measurement shall be from centerline of manhole to centerline of manhole along the centerline of the pipeline to the nearest linear


foot (LF). Diameters shall be measured for payment in inches to the nearest diameter bid (or calculated equivalent diameter for noncircular pipes).


E. Contract Item A-60 to A-66 – CCTV Inspection with 3D Laser Profile

1. Description: This item applies to investigation of sewer pipes to determine the condition, dimensions, and shape of sewer pipes. This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization and demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services; traffic control; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; field data collection of CCTV videos and 3D laser profiles; data processing and reporting; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02732. Any required pipe cleaning, manhole modifications for access, or raising frames and covers will be paid under separate pay items.



F. Contract Item A-67 to A-81 – Sonar Profile

1. Description: This item applies to investigation of sewer pipes to determine the condition, dimensions, and shape of sewer pipes. This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization and demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services; traffic control; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; field data collection sonar profiles; data processing and reporting; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02732. Any required pipe cleaning, manhole modifications for access, or raising frames and covers will be paid under separate pay items.



G. Contract Item A-82 – H2S Gas & Temperature Data Collection


1. Description: This item applies to investigation of sewer pipes to determine H2S and temperature levels. This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization and demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services; traffic control; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; H2S field data collection; data processing and reporting; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02732.

H. Contract Item A-83 – Manhole Inspections

1. Description: This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization and demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services to provide MACP manhole and connection sewer inspections; traffic control; data processing and reporting; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02652. Payment for raising frames and covers shall be paid under separate bid items.

2. Measurement: Measurement shall be made per each (EA) manhole inspected.

3. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit prices for actual quantities measured and accepted

I. Contract Item A-84 – Dyed-Water Testing

1. Description: Dyed-Water Testing is intended to be used to identify live lateral connections, connections to drop inlets and connections to sinkholes. This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization/demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services; transportation, storage, handling; traffic control; dyed-water testing; dye; resident notification and coordination; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; CCTV of dye entering mains; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02654.

2. Measurement: Measurement shall be made per each (EA) lateral dye tested.


J. Contract Item A-85 – Sewer Smoke Testing

1. Description: Sewer Smoke Testing is intended to be used to identify connections to sewer mains. This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization/demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services; transportation, storage, handling; traffic control; smoke generators; smoke testing; fire department and resident notification and coordination; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02653.


2. Measurement: Measurement shall be made per each (EA) smoke test.


K. Contract Item A-86 - Trim Protruding Service Connections with Cleaning Equipment (Pipe Size of 8-inch to 36-inch):

1. Description: Trimming of protruding service connections to provide access for future maintenance or CIPP installation shall be performed using conventional tap trimming/cutting equipment and tools employed during the cleaning operation, including manned entry in larger pipes. This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization and demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services; traffic control; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; closed circuit television (CCTV) to monitor cutting operation; protruding tap removal; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02760. Tap trimming will be conducted as part of the cleaning operation. Therefore, final CCTV to verify adequacy and quality of Work will be separately paid under other bid items for CCTV Inspection.

2. Measurement: Measurement shall be per each (EA).


L. Contract Item A-87 – Robotic Trimming of Protruding Taps

1. Description: Robotic trimming of protruding service connections provides for removal or reductions of protruding taps in significantly deteriorated pipes to provide access for future maintenance or CIPP installation. Robotic equipment such as tap reinstatement or pipe repair robots are used for this Work. This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization and demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services; traffic control; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; closed circuit television (CCTV) to monitor cutting operation; protruding tap removal; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02760. Tap trimming will be conducted as part of the cleaning operation. Therefore, final CCTV to verify adequacy and quality of Work will be separately paid under other bid items for cleaning and CCTV Inspection.

2. Measurement: Measurement shall be per each (EA).


M. Contract Item A-88 – Raise Manhole Frame & Cover:


1. Description: Raise Manhole Frame & Cover includes locating and raising (up to 12”) to grade or replacing frames and covers. This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization/demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services; traffic control; transportation, storage, handling; locating and uncovering buried or paved-over covers; adjusting the manhole frames and covers to meet existing grade; site restoration (including base pavement restoration); incidentals and appurtenant work. Where directed by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR will provide new frames and covers and will be paid for these materials under separate bid items.

2. Measurement: Measurement shall be made per each (EA).


N. Contract Item A-89 & A-90 - Manhole Frames & Covers

1. Description: These items provide new manhole frame and cover materials to be incorporated in other Work items where new frames and covers are required. Materials shall conform to City standards. The unit price per item will be full compensation for providing all labor, manhole frames and covers, delivery incidentals and appurtenant work.

2. Measurement: Measurement shall be made per each (EA).


O. Contract Item A-91 - CCTV Inspection of 3” to 8” Laterals

1. Description: This item is intended for use for lateral investigation in conjunction with main line CCTV investigation to identify requirements for lateral repair, tehabilitation or replacement. This item includes but is not limited to all mobilization and demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools, equipment and services; traffic control; 4-inch discharge and smaller bypass systems; closed circuit television (CCTV) of laterals using a lateral launch camera from the main; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements in Section 02651. CCTV of the main line shall be additionally paid under separate pay items. Lateral cleaning is not required or included in this Work item.

2. Measurement for Payment: Measurement shall be per each (EA) lateral pipe to the property line or other end point as may be defined by the OWNER.



P. Contract Items B-1 through B-7 – Hourly Work As Directed:

1. Description: This item provides for hourly services for unanticipated work determined by the OWNER as not included in other bid items. Hourly bid items include all mobilization/demobilization; labor; materials; fuel; tools; equipment and services; CSE equipment; CCTV-mounted location equipment; traffic control; site restoration; incidentals and appurtenant work, all complete in accordance with the requirements of specifications.

2. Measurement for Payment: Measurement shall be by the hour for labor and equipment actually employed at the site. Travel time to or from the site will not be measured for payment.

3. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit prices for actual quantities measured and accepted

END OF SECTION

01300-1 9/2015

SECTION 01300

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Description B. Definitions

C. Submittal Procedures

D. ENGINEER’S Actions on Submittals

E. Repetitive Reviews

F. Example Format for CONTRACTOR’s Approval and Certification Stamp

G. CONTRACTOR’s Submittal Transmittal Form

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section specifies procedural requirements for submittals made by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER. Specific submittals required for individual elements of the Work are specified in the associated, individual Specification Sections. Except as otherwise indicated in other Specification Sections, comply with the requirements specified herein for each type of submittal.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Shop Drawings: The term “Shop Drawings”, as used in the General Conditions includes all “Action Submittals” and “Information Submittals” as defined below.

B. Action Submittals: The following submittals require approval by the ENGINEER

as described in Subsection 3.2 of this Section: 1. Manufacturer’s Documents: Technical data, drawings and other similar

information specially prepared for this Project by product manufacturers and suppliers, including fabrication and installation drawings, diagrams, actual performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, instructions, design mix formulas, measurements, and similar information not in standard printed form.

01300-2 9/2015

2. Product Data: Stock or standard printed information on materials and equipment that has not been specially prepared for this Project, including specifications, installation instructions, catalog cuts, wiring diagrams, and color charts.

3. Working Drawings: Technical data, drawings and other similar information

specially prepared for this Project by the CONTRACTOR or Subcontractors, including fabrication and installation drawings, diagrams, and other similar information.

4. Samples: Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that

are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged.

5. Mock-Ups: Special types of samples that are too large or otherwise

inconvenient for handling in the manner specified for transmittal of sample submittals.

6. "Or Equal" or Substitution Requests: Refer to Section 01010 (General

Conditions).

C. Information Submittals: The following submittals require acknowledgement by the ENGINEER as described in Subsection 3.2 of this Section:

1. CONTRACTOR’s Licensed Professional Submittals: Certificates and other

documents required by the Contract Documents to be prepared and submitted by the CONTRACTOR’s Licensed Professionals.

2. Inspection and Test Reports 3. Mill reports

4. Guarantees

5. Warranties

6. Certifications

7. Experience records

8. Maintenance agreements 9. Operation and maintenance manuals

10. Survey data and reports: property surveys, building or structure condition

surveys, field measurements, quantitative records of actual Work, damage surveys, photographs, and similar data required by Specification sections.

01300-3 9/2015

11. Physical work records

12. Quality testing and certifying reports

13. Industry standards 14. Record drawings

D. Other Submittals: For submittals concerning the following refer to the indicated

Contract Document Section:

1. Suppliers, and subcontractors - Section 01010 (General Conditions), Section 01020 (Special Conditions), and Section 01030 (Forms and Attachments)

2. Construction progress schedule – Section 01325

3. Schedule of shop drawing submissions - Section 01010 (General

Conditions).

4. Bonds – Section 01010 (General Conditions) and Section 01030

5. Payment applications – Section 01010 (General Conditions) and Section 01150

6. Insurance certificates – Section 01010 (General Conditions)

E. Clarifications and Interpretations:

1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible to review the Contract Documents, determine the type and extent of the Work and make all necessary field measurements before starting the Work. If any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is discovered the CONTRACTOR is to submit a written request for interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will issue a written clarification or interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents as ENGINEER may determine necessary, consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the CONTRACTOR.

2. If the CONTRACTOR submits a written request for information that does not, in the sole discretion of the ENGINEER, require clarification or interpretation of the Contract Documents, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR that such information is contained (or could otherwise be reasonably determined) in the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for ENGINEER’s charges for evaluating and responding to such a request for information.

01300-4 9/2015

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Scheduling:

1. Submit a preliminary schedule of submittals, in duplicate, and in accordance with the General Conditions for acceptance by the ENGINEER. ENGINEER will review no submittals until an acceptable schedule of submittals has been submitted. If the CONTRACTOR intends to request a substitute(s) for the materials or equipment specified, schedule substitution request(s), along with any related, subsequent submittals, in the schedule of submittals and submit as scheduled.

2. Schedule, prepare and transmit each submittal to ENGINEER sufficiently in

advance of scheduled performance of related Work and other applicable activities.

B. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the preparation and processing of submittals with the

performance of the Work. Coordinate each submittal with other submittals and related activities, such as substitution requests, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar activities that require sequential performance. Coordinate submissions for different items of interrelated work so that one submittal will not be delayed by ENGINEER's need to review a related submittal.

2. ENGINEER may return any submittal requiring coordination with other

submittals without review and marked “Revise and Resubmit”. This type of returned submittal will be counted as a submittal subject to the provisions of 3.3 –REPETITIVE REVIEWS of this Section.

3. The ENGINEER will not hold a submittal awaiting additional information from the CONTRACTOR.

C. Submittal Preparation:

1. All Submittals: Review each submittal to determine, as applicable, that:

01300-5 9/2015

a. The submittal is required by the Contract Documents. The ENGINEER will only review submittals required by the Contract Documents.

b. The materials and equipment depicted in the submittal are intended

for incorporation into the Work. c. The submittal is complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready

determination of compliance with the Contract Documents.

d. The items depicted in the submittal will fit in the space available.

e. The information in the submittal has been coordinated with the requirements of the Contract Documents; work to be performed by all trades involved; field measurements and other requirements of the Work.

f. The submittal does not contain standard printed information unless

full identification of the project-specific portions and any project-specific supplementary information is shown thereon in ink or typewritten form.

g. The submittal does not encompass more than one Section of the

Specifications.

h. The submittal presents, where applicable, such data as dimensions, weights, and performance characteristics on drawings for mechanical and electrical equipment. Show conformance with the performance characteristics and other criteria included in the Contract Documents. Review of such information will be subject to the provisions of the General Conditions.

i. Variations from the Contract Documents have been specifically noted

on the Submittal Transmittal Form and highlighted on all relative documents within the submittal that are affected by the variation. ENGINEER's responsibility for variations is established in the General Conditions.

j. The submittal is in compliance with the Contract Documents and a

completed approval and certification stamp has been placed on each submittal document. Use a rubber stamp containing the information shown in the sample stamp at the end of this section. ENGINEER will rely upon CONTRACTOR’s certification of compliance that the CONTRACTOR has reviewed and approved the submittal and has confirmed that the submittal conforms to all the requirements of the Contract Documents except for variations specifically noted on the Submittal Transmittal Form and all attached documents. Submittals

01300-6 9/2015

will be returned to CONTRACTOR without action if certification is not provided and the submittal will be counted as a submittal subject to the provisions of 3.3 –REPETITIVE REVIEWS of this Section.

2. Manufacturer’s Documents and Working Drawing submittals:

a. Accurately and distinctly present the following:

(1) Graphical information at accurate scale

(2) Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer or

supplier

(3) Materials and equipment that are to be included in the Work

(4) Compliance with standards

(5) All dimensions, clearly identifying those dimensions based on field measurement

(6) Arrangements and sectional views

(7) Necessary details, including complete information on making

connections between Work in this project, work in other related projects and existing facilities

(8) Electrical wiring connections between all equipment provided

including all internal wiring between internal components of equipment

(9) Kinds of materials and finishes

(10) Parts list and descriptions thereof

(11) Spare parts, lubricants or special tools required by the Contract

Documents

b. Include the following on each drawing or page:

(1) Preparation date and revision dates

(2) Project name

(3) Specification Section number and page number

(4) Identification of equipment or materials

01300-7 9/2015

(5) Name of CONTRACTOR (and Subcontractor if applicable)

(6) Name of Supplier and/or Manufacturer

(7) Field dimensions, clearly identified

(8) Standards or industry specification references

(9) Identification of variations from the Contract Document requirements

(10) Physical location and location relative to other facilities that the

Work-related equipment or materials are to be installed adjacent to or connected with

(11) Provide 8-inch wide by 3-inch high blank space for

CONTRACTOR’s and ENGINEER’s stamps

c. Submit eight (8) copies of all submittals and re-submittals. Two copies will be returned to the CONTRACTOR.

3. Product Data:

a. Assemble all data into a single submittal for each element of work or

system. Where product data has been printed to include information on several similar products, some of which are not required for use on the subject Project, clearly mark copies to show such information is not applicable.

b. Where data must be specially prepared for required materials or

equipment because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit the data as a Manufacturer’s Document and not as Product Data.

c. Submit product data with appropriate Manufacturer’s Document or

Working Drawing, when applicable.

d. Submit 3 copies.

4. Samples:

a. Whenever possible, provide samples physically identical with the materials proposed for incorporation into the Work. Where variations in color, pattern or texture and the like are inherent in materials represented by samples, submit multiple samples (not less than 3) showing the approximate range of variations.

01300-8 9/2015

b. Submit samples for visual review of generic kind, color, pattern, texture, and for a final check of coordination of these characteristics with other related elements of the Work and existing facilities.

c. Include information with each sample to provide a generic description

of the item, and its name, manufacturer, limitations, and compliance with standards.

d. Submit 3 sets of samples, where specifications indicate selection of

color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from manufacturer's range of standard choices is necessary.

5. Mock-Ups:

a. Mock-ups and similar samples are recognized as special types of

samples. Comply with samples submittal requirements to the greatest extent possible. Process Submittal Transmittal Forms to provide a record of activity.

6. Requests for "Or Equal" or Substitution

b. Follow the General Conditions, except for the following:

CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for ENGINEER’s charges for evaluating a proposed “Or Equal” that receives a negative determination.

6. CONTRACTOR’s Licensed Professional Submittals

a. Submit 3 copies of certificates and other documents required by the

Contract Documents to be prepared and submitted by the CONTRACTOR’s Licensed Professionals.

7. Inspection and Test Reports:

a. Identify each inspection and test report as either specially prepared for

the Project or a standard publication of workmanship control testing at point of production. Submit in accordance with the requirements for Manufacturer’s Documents or Product Data, respectively as described in this Section.

8. Mill Test Reports, Experience Records, Physical Work Records, Guarantees,

Warranties, and Maintenance Agreements:

(1) Refer to the Contract Documents sections for specific requirements.

01300-9 9/2015

9. Survey Data: a. Refer to the various Contract Documents for specific requirements.

Furnish 2 copies. Provide 10 copies of final property survey (if any).

10. Certifications, Quality Testing and Certifying Reports:

a. Refer to Specification sections for specific requirements on submittal of certifications. Submit 8 copies. Certifications are submitted for review of conformance with specified requirements and information. Submittal is final when returned by the ENGINEER marked “Approved”.

11. Closeout Submittals:

a. Refer to Specification sections and Section 01789 for specific

requirements on submittal of closeout information, materials, tools, and similar items such as:

(1) Warranties and Bonds (2) Record Drawings (3) Special Tools

D. Submittal Transmittal Form: Use the Submittal Transmittal Form found at the end

of this Section to forward each specific submittal package to the ENGINEER. Provide all the information indicated on the Form and answer each question. Submittals with incomplete information on the Submittal Transmittal Form will be returned to the CONTRACTOR marked “Revise and Resubmit” and will be counted as a submittal subject to the provisions of 3.3 –REPETITIVE REVIEWS of this Section.

E. Submittal Numbering:

1. Number all submittals as follows:

(A) - (B)

Where: (A) = Specification Section Number (B) = Consecutive submittal number for the Specification Section

Number listed in (A), with an alphabetic suffix indicating the sequential version of the submittal.

Examples: 01300-001A indicates the initial version of submittal

number 001 for Specification Section 01300.

01300-10 9/2015

01300-001B indicates the second version of submittal number 001 for Specification Section 01300.

01300-002A indicates the initial version of submittal number 002 for Specification Section 01300.

2. When a document(s) is resubmitted for any reason, use a new Submittal

Transmittal Form with the same submittal number and a new, sequential alphabetic suffix.

F. Resubmittal Preparation:

1. Comply with the requirements described in the Submittal Preparation

subsection above. In addition:

a. Identify on the Submittal Transmittal Form that submittal is a resubmission.

b. Make and clearly identify any corrections or changes required by

ENGINEER's notations on the previous, returned submittal.

c. Respond to ENGINEER's notations:

(1) On the Submittal Transmittal Form or on a separate page(s) attached to the Submittal Transmittal Form, answer or acknowledge, in writing, all notations or questions indicated by ENGINEER on the ENGINEER's response to the previous submittal.

(2) Identify each response by the corresponding question or

notation number established by ENGINEER.

(3) If CONTRACTOR does not respond to each notation or question, the ENGINEER will return the resubmission without action. Additional resubmittals will be required until the CONTRACTOR provides a written response to all of the ENGINEER's notations or questions.

d. Indicate CONTRACTOR initiated revisions or variations:

(1) On the Submittal Transmittal Form identify variations or revisions from the previously reviewed submittal, other than those called for by ENGINEER.

01300-11 9/2015

G. Distribution

1. Manufacturer’s Documents, Working Drawings, Product Data and Samples and Mock-ups: a. After a submittal is stamped “Approved” (See Subsection 3.2), place

the date of approval on five additional copies of the submittal and transmit to the ENGINEER together with one copy of a Submittal Transmittal Form indicating the submittal is a “Distribution of Approved Submittal”. For Mockups, distribute a Submittal Transmittal Form only.

After a submittal is stamped “Approved as Noted” (See Subsection 3.2), make the changes noted by ENGINEER and place the date of approval on five additional copies of the submittal and transmit to the ENGINEER together with one copy of a Submittal Transmittal Form indicating the submittal is a “Distribution of Approved as Noted Submittal”.

b. If changes other than those marked by the ENGINEER are made,

follow the requirements of Paragraph 3.1, F to obtain ENGINEER approval.

c. Unless required elsewhere, provide distribution of ”Approved” and

“Approved as Noted” submittals to subcontractors, suppliers, governing authorities, and others as necessary for proper performance of the Work.

d. Maintain one set of ”Approved” and revised “Approved as Noted”

submittals at the Project site, available for use by the ENGINEER and others.

e. Maintain returned final set of samples at the Project site, in suitable

condition and available for quality control comparisons throughout the course of performing the Work. Incorporate only undamaged samples into the Work, when permitted by the Contract Documents.

H. CONTRACTOR’s Licensed Professional Submittals

a. After a submittal is acknowledged by the ENGINEER (See Subsection 3.2,2), place the date of acknowledgement on five additional copies of the submittal and transmit to the ENGINEER together with one copy of a Submittal Transmittal Form indicating the submittal is a “Distribution of Acknowledged Submittal”.

b. Maintain one set of submittals at the Project site, available for use by

the ENGINEER and others.

01300-12 9/2015

3.2 ENGINEER’S ACTIONS ON SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Review and approval by the ENGINEER of Action Submittals will be subject to the provisions of General Conditions. ENGINEER’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole. ENGINEER’s review or approval of any submittal does not authorize a change to the Contract Time or Price.

2. ENGINEER’s review and approval of Action Submittals will not extend to

means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or proce-dure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) nor to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item is a part.

3. ENGINEER will stamp each Action Submittal except Requests for

Interpretation or Clarification with an appropriate action stamp.

B. ENGINEER’s Action

1. Stamps:

a. Approved:

(1) Where submittals are stamped "Approved", Work covered by submittal may proceed PROVIDED THE WORK COMPLIES WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Acceptance of Work will depend upon that compliance.

b. Approved As Noted:

(1) When submittals are stamped "Approved as Noted", Work

covered by submittal may proceed PROVIDED IT COMPLIES WITH ENGINEER'S NOTATIONS AND CORRECTIONS ON SUBMITTAL AND WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Acceptance of Work will depend on that compliance.

01300-13 9/2015

c. Revise and Resubmit:

(1) When submittals are stamped "Revise and Resubmit” do not proceed with Work covered by submittal. Do not permit Work covered by submittal to be used at Project site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

(2) Revise submittal in accordance with ENGINEER's notations

and corrections and resubmit in accordance with Subsection 3.1F of this Section.

2. Acknowledgements of Information Submittals

a. When Information Submittals conform to the format requirements in the Contract Documents ENGINEER will acknowledge such submittals via a response transmittal.

b. If an Information Submittal does not conform to the format requirements of the Contract Documents, ENGINEER will return the submittal with comments or questions. Do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal and do not permit Work covered by the submittal to be used at Project site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. Resubmit the Information Submittal until the ENGINEER acknowledges that the submittal conforms to the format required.

3.3 REPETITIVE REVIEWS

A. Cost of Repetitive Reviews: Submittals will be reviewed no more than twice at the OWNER's expense. All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to the ENGINEER and at the CONTRACTOR's expense based on the ENGINEER's then prevailing rates including all direct and indirect costs and fees. Reimburse the OWNER for all such costs and fees invoiced to the OWNER by the ENGINEER for third and subsequent submittals.

B. Time Extension: Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in

ENGINEER's review of submittals, will not entitle CONTRACTOR to an extension of the Contract Time.

3.4 EXAMPLE FORMAT FOR CONTRACTOR’S APPROVAL AND

CERTIFICATION STAMP

A. An example format for the CONTRACTOR’s approval and certification stamp is as follows:

01300-14 9/2015

CONTRACTOR’S NAME

_____ Approved and Certified to comply with the Contract Documents. _____ Approved and Certified to comply with the Contract Documents, except for variations

specifically noted on the Submittal Transmittal Form and the associated documents. PRINTED NAME: ______________________________________________________ TITLE: _______________________________________________________________ SIGNATURE: _________________________________________________________ DATE: _______________________________________________________________

3.5 CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM

A. The format for the CONTRACTOR’s Submittal Transmittal Form is as follows:

01300-15 9/2015

CONTRACTOR’S NAME SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM

Project Name

TO: ATTN: FROM:

DATE: SITE: SPEC. REF. NO. DRAWING REF. NO. SUBMITTAL NO.

1. The following documents are forwarded for your review:

No. of Repros/Copies

Document Originator Description

Document No.

Date

/

/

/

/

/

/

2. Will item submitted for review fit in space provided in the Contract Documents? ______ Yes ______ No ______ Not Applicable 3. Has work indicated in this submittal been coordinated with all trades? ______ Yes ______ No ______ Not Applicable 4. Has the Contractor approved submittal and affixed

completed approval and certification stamp? ______ Yes ______ No 5. Contractor's description and justification for variations from the Contract Documents. (Use additional

pages, if necessary) 6. Remarks: Printed Name: ________________________________________ Signature:

CIPASRR 01300-16 9/2015

END OF SECTION

01311-1 9/2015

SECTION 01311

PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Form of Schedules

B. Working Hours

C. Scheduling Responsibilities

D. Submittals

E. Network Requirements

F. Cost Loading

G. Progress of the Work

H. Schedule Updates

I. Causes for Extensions of Time

J. Abnormal Weather

K. Approval Requests

L. Adjustment by OWNER 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES

A. Prepare schedules in the form of critical path method (CPM) as described herein.

1. Provide separate CPM networks (subnetworks) of activities for each process or facility.

2. Each subnetwork shall be assigned a code and separate activity numbering

series.

3. Interrelationships between subnetworks and any individual activities shall be identified.

01311-2 9/2015

1.3 WORKING HOURS

A. Work Hours: Perform work between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. on weekdays only. Do not perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, City holidays, or between 5:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. without written permission of OWNER. Extraordinary noise such as driving sheeting shall only be permitted between 9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. The contractor may request additional work hours for approval by the City.

B. Holidays: The City observes a five-day work week and the following holidays:

New Year's Day; Martin Luther King's Birthday; Washington's Birthday; Easter Monday; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Veterans Day; Thanksgiving Day; the Friday after Thanksgiving; Christmas Eve and Christmas Day. The CONTRACTOR will not be permitted to work on these holidays unless otherwise authorized by the ENGINEER.

C. Work After Hours: Night work may be established by CONTRACTOR as regular

procedure with written permission of OWNER. Such permission, however, may be revoked at any time by OWNER if CONTRACTOR fails to maintain adequate equipment and supervision for proper prosecution and control of work at night.

D. Emergencies: In case of an emergency which may require that work be done on

Saturdays, Sundays, holidays or longer than ten hours per day, the CONTRACTOR shall request the permission of the ENGINEER to do so. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the emergency is bona fide, he will grant permission to the CONTRACTOR to work such hours as may be necessary. Also, if in the opinion of the ENGINEER, a bona fide emergency exists, he may direct the CONTRACTOR to work such hours as may be necessary whether the CONTRACTOR requests permission to do so or not.

1.4 SCHEDULING RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Critical Path Method type construction schedule will be used to monitor job progress and as a means to make monthly payments to the CONTRACTOR except for Stored Materials which will be made in accordance with Section 6 of the General Conditions of the Contract. Be responsible for providing all information concerning the sequencing, logic and durations of all activities as well as providing the initial CPM logic network diagram and tabular report data. Once the initial logic network diagram is accepted, be responsible for providing monthly update information on logic changes, percent complete, actual start and finish dates, and duration changes. The CONTRACTOR will not be required to produce the monthly computerized printout of the schedule updates. The monthly updating and report and plot generation will be performed by the Construction Manager using information provided by the CONTRACTOR.

01311-3 9/2015

B. From the CONTRACTOR's initial schedule submittal and from information received at the monthly schedule update meetings, computerized and dated tabular schedule reports, updated network diagrams, and bar charts will be produced which will be reviewed by the CONTRACTOR for accuracy and integrity. It shall at all times remain the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to schedule and direct his forces in a manner that will allow for the completion of the work within the Contract Time.

C. It should be clearly understood that the initial schedule and all update information

must be provided by the CONTRACTOR, and that this information is a representation of the best efforts of the CONTRACTOR and his subcontractors as to how they envision the work to be accomplished. Similarly, all progress information to be provided by and through the CONTRACTOR must be an accurate representation of his, or his subcontractor's, or supplier's actual performance. The schedule shall at all times remain an accurate reflection of the CONTRACTOR's actual or projected sequencing of work. Once accepted, adherence to the established CPM schedule shall be obligatory upon the CONTRACTOR, and his subcontractors for the work under this Contract. The ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to revise the schedule if, in his judgment, the schedule does not accurately reflect the actual execution of the work, or is in violation of any provision of the CPM scheduling requirements; and the CONTRACTOR shall revise the schedule as often as is necessary to bring the course of performance of the work without additional cost to the OWNER.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division 1.

B. CPM Schedule:

1. Within fifteen (15) calendar days after Notice to Proceed, submit six (6)

prints of the proposed CPM network diagrams, tabular reports for the entire Contract duration and include both procurement and construction activities. Sort the tabular reports by total float and activity number. They shall also contain a predecessor/successor resource loading report, and project calendar. This logic diagram shall be drawn as described herein and will be the subject of a schedule review meeting with the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER, and OWNER's representatives within two (2) weeks of its submission.

2. In lieu of the network diagrams and reports, Primavera schedules on floppy

disk may be submitted.

01311-4 9/2015

3. If a review of the submitted CPM Schedule indicates a work plan which will not complete the work within the Contract Time stated in the Contract, revise the CPM Schedule as required and resubmit it until it is acceptable. Failure to submit an acceptable schedule may, at the OWNER's sole discretion, be cause for the withholding of any partial payment(s) otherwise due under the Contract.

4. Acceptance of the schedule shall not constitute a representation by the OWNER or ENGINEER that the work can be completed as shown on the schedule.

C. Submittals Schedule:

1. In addition to the above scheduling requirements, submit a complete and

detailed listing of anticipated submittals during the course of the Contract. Coordinate submittals with those of subcontractors and suppliers, and identify each submittal as specified. Indicated the anticipated submission date for each submittal along with the date on which its return is anticipated. Review time for submittal shall be as provided for in Section 01300 - Submittals. Durations shown for review shall be to share available float for that path. Submittals and the review time, of which are on the critical path, shall be clearly marked in red with the words "Critical Path" by the CONTRACTOR at the time of submission.

2. Submit the Submittal Schedule within fifteen (15) working days from the

Notice to Proceed. The Submittal Schedule will then be accepted or revised as required, and the CONTRACTOR will incorporate the dates and review durations into his CPM Schedule.

1.6 NETWORK REQUIREMENTS

A. The network diagram shall show the interdependence of activities, and the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished as planned by the CONTRACTOR. The basic concept of the network analysis diagram is to show how the start of a given activity is dependent on the completion of preceding activities, and its completion restricts the start of succeeding activities. A time scaled precedence format will be followed. The detailed network diagram will be time scaled showing a continuous flow from left to right.

B. The Schedule Activities shall be developed into three major groups:

1. Procurement Activities: Procurement Activities shall include at a minimum:

a. Permits b. Easements c. Program(s) d. Submittal Items

01311-5 9/2015

e. Approval of Submittal Items f. Fabrication and Delivery of Submittal Items

Permits, easements, and fabrication and delivery items shall be tied logically to the correct construction activity in the overall CPM construction schedule.

2. Construction Activities: Construction activities will be physical work

activities that describe how the job will be constructed.

3. Testing, Startup, Training and Close-out: CPM activities for this group shall include all work required to satisfy to appropriate specification sections and meet the requirements of substantial and final completion.

C. Break the work into activities, with durations of one to twenty (1 to 20) working

days each, except for non-construction activities (such as procurement of materials and delivery of equipment), and other activities which may require longer durations. To the extent feasible, activities related to a specific physical area of the project shall be grouped on the network for ease of understanding and simplification. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the review of the ENGINEER.

D. Each activity on the network shall have indicated for it the following:

1. A single duration, no longer than 20 days (i.e., the single best estimate of the

expected elapsed time considering the scope of work involved in the activity) expressed in working days. City holidays and weather delays shall be included. One critical path shall be shown for the schedule.

2. An activity I.D. number will be assigned to each activity. The I.D. number

will be numeric with a maximum of ten (10) digits.

3. A brief description of the activity will be included. If this description is not definitive, a separate listing of each activity and a descriptive narrative may be required.

4. Each activity (except for procurement activities) shall be cost loaded to

indicate the total estimated costs of the activity. No activity shall exceed $60,000 except if an equipment item. Material costs shall be assigned to delivery activities.

5. Each construction activity shall be man-hour loaded with the estimated man-

hours to be expended on each activity.

E. When preparing the CPM construction schedule, consider all construction sequence and critical construction activities requirements.

01311-6 9/2015

F. Failure to include on a network any element of work required for the performance of this Contract shall not excuse the CONTRACTOR from completing all work required within the applicable Contract Time, notwithstanding ENGINEER's network review.

G. A CPM schedule which shows a completion of any portion of the construction

work (not including testing and start-up) prior to the Contract Time dates may be accepted but in no event shall be acceptable as a basis for a claim for delay against the OWNER by the CONTRACTOR.

H. The schedule calendar shall be a 5 day work week with holidays corresponding to

those observed by the City of Richmond's Department of Public Utilities. 1.7 COST LOADING

A. Schedule of Values:

1. Each activity for Work-in-Place on the construction schedule shall be allocated a dollar value in accordance with paragraph 1.5D.4 above. Each activity's assigned cost shall consist of labor, equipment, and materials costs, and a prorated contribution to overhead and profit. The sum of the activities costs shall be equal to the total contract price. Activities not directly related to Work-in-Place including Stored Materials, preparation and submittal of Shop or Working Drawings, or other required submittal or equipment and material procurement shall not be cost loaded. In submitting cost data the CONTRACTOR certifies that they are not unbalanced, and that the value assigned to each activity represents the CONTRACTOR's estimate of the actual costs of performing that activity. The listing of cost loaded CPM activities will become the Schedule of Values, and will serve as the basis for payments to the CONTRACTOR.

2. The accepted schedule of values shall represent a fair, reasonable and

equitable dollar cost allocation for each activity on the CONTRACTOR's construction schedule.

B. Documentation: If it is determined that the cost data do not meet the requirements

for a balanced bid breakdown, provide documentation substantiating any cost allocation on the cost data. Cost allocations shall be considered unbalanced if an activity on the construction schedule has been assigned a disproportionate allocation of direct costs, overhead and profit.

01311-7 9/2015

1.8 PROGRESS OF THE WORK

A. The work shall be started on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed, and shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent delay to other contractors or to the general completion of the project. The work shall be executed at such times and in or on such parts of the project, with such forces, material and equipment, as to assure completion of the work in the time established by the Contract. Additionally, schedule and direct the work so that it provides an orderly progression of the work to completion within the specified Contract Time.

B. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly CPM Schedule update

that delays to the critical path have resulted; and these delays are through no fault of the OWNER, or OWNER's representatives, and hence, that the Contract completion date will not be met, or when so directed by the ENGINEER, take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the OWNER.

1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will

substantially eliminate the backlog of work.

2. Increase the number of working hours per shift; shifts per working day, or days, per week; the amount of construction equipment; the forms for concrete work; etc., or any combination of the foregoing to substantially eliminate the backlog of work.

3. Schedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of

accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule.

C. Submit for review a written statement of the steps to be taken to remove, or arrest the delay to the schedule. If the CONTRACTOR fails to submit a written statement of the steps he intends to take or fails to take such steps as required by the Contract; the OWNER may direct the level of effort in manpower and trades, equipment, work schedule and overtime to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the accepted schedule, and the CONTRACTOR shall promptly provide such level of effort at no additional cost to the OWNER. In addition, should schedule delays persist, the CONTRACTOR's bond agent will be asked to attend meetings to update the schedule.

D. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with the requirements of this provision

shall subject him to, at the OWNER's sole discretion, withholding, in partial or in total, payments otherwise due the CONTRACTOR for work performed under this Contract. The CONTRACTOR agrees that any withholding of moneys is not a penalty for noncompliance, but is an assurance for the OWNER that funds will be available to implement these requirements should the CONTRACTOR fail to do so, since failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with these requirements shall mean that the CONTRACTOR failed to execute the work with such diligence as to ensure its completion within the time for completion.

01311-8 9/2015

1.9 SCHEDULE UPDATES

A. Monthly Meetings: A monthly Schedule Update Meeting will be held on the 25th day of each month, or nearest day thereto, at the construction site to review and update the CPM Schedule. The Schedule Update Meeting will be chaired by the ENGINEER and attended by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. Actual progress of the previous month will be recorded and future activities will be reviewed. The duration of activities and their logical connections may be revised as needed. Decisions made at these meetings and agreed to by all parties are binding with the exception that no contract completion dates will be modified without formal written requests and acceptance as specified herein. In either case, provide the following information for each update at a minimum:

1. Actual start and finished dates for all completed activities.

2. Actual start dates for all started but incomplete activities including

remaining durations and/or percent completes.

B. Withholding of Payments: Failure to provide specified updated information or failure to attend progress meetings may result in the withholding of progress payments.

1.10 CAUSES FOR EXTENSIONS OF TIME

A. The Contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this Contract. In the event the CONTRACTOR requests an extension of any contract completion date, he shall furnish justification and supporting evidence per the General Conditions, and provide a detailed CPM Schedule delay analysis based on the most current updated CPM Schedule. The ENGINEER will after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence, make findings of fact and will advise the CONTRACTOR in writing thereof. If the ENGINEER finds that the CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of the Contract completion date under the provisions of the Contract, the ENGINEER's determination as to the total number of days extensions shall be based upon the current accepted and updated CPM schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included in the next monthly updating of the schedule. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that actual delays in activities, which according to the CPM schedule, do not affect any contract completion date shown by the critical path in the network, do not have any effect on the Contract completion date or dates, and therefore will not be the basis for a change in Contract completion time.

B. Float Time: Without obligation to extend the Contract Times or any intermediate

completion dates set out in the CPM network, the OWNER may initiate changes to the Contract work that absorb float time only. OWNER-initiated changes that affect the critical path on the CPM network shall be the sole grounds for extending or shortening the Contract Times. Contractor initiated changes that encroach on the float time, identified in the CPM network, may be accomplished with the

01311-9 9/2015

OWNER's concurrence. Such changes, however, shall give way to OWNER-initiated changes competing for the same float time.

1.11 ABNORMAL WEATHER

A. The Contract Period will be adjusted to account for unusually severe weather conditions which prevent or inhibit the CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work and lengthen the critical path indicated on the Schedule (such unusually severe weather conditions referred to herein as "Inclement Weather"). It is the intent of this provision to offset the impact of Inclement Weather with unusually favorable weather conditions which immediately precede and/or follow the occurrence of Inclement Weather.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of the occurrence of

Inclement Weather within two days after the onset of such Inclement Weather and shall describe in reasonable detail the type of Inclement Weather encountered by the CONTRACTOR and the Work thereby interfered with or interrupted.

C. This provision specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for

unusually severe weather. In order for the ENGINEER to award a time extension under this clause, the following conditions must be satisfied:

1. The weather experienced at the project site during the contract period must

be found to be unusually severe, that is, more severe than the adverse weather anticipated for the project location during any given month.

2. The unusually severe weather must actually cause a delay to the completion

of the project. The delay must be beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the CONTRACTOR.

D. Schedule: The following Schedule of Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather

Delays is based on National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar data for the project location and will constitute the base line for monthly weather time evaluations. The CONTRACTOR's progress schedule must reflect these anticipated adverse weather delays in all weather dependent activities.

SCHEDULE OF MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAYS

WORK DAYS BASED ON (5) DAY WORK WEEK

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

City of Richmond

10 9 9 6 8 7 8 7 6 5 7 9

E. Records: Upon acknowledgement of the Notice to Proceed and continuing

throughout the contract, the CONTRACTOR will record daily, and submit to the ENGINEER, the occurrence of adverse weather and resultant impact to normally scheduled work. Actual adverse weather delay days must prevent work on critical activities for 50 percent or more of the CONTRACTOR's scheduled work day.

01311-10 9/2015

F. Impacted Days: The number of actual adverse weather days shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather (even if adverse weather occurred in previous month), be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month, and be recorded as full days. If the number of actual adverse weather delay days exceeds the number of days anticipated in the Schedule of Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather Delays, above, the ENGINEER will convert any qualifying delays to calendar days, giving full consideration for equivalent fair weather work days, and issue a modification in accordance with Section 01035 - CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE.

1.12 APPROVAL REQUESTS

A. From time to time, as the work progresses and in the sequence indicated by the accepted progress schedule, the CONTRACTOR must submit to the ENGINEER a specific request, in writing, for each item of information or approval required of him by the Contract. These requests must be submitted sufficiently in advance of the date upon which the information or approval is actually required by the CONTRACTOR to allow for the time the ENGINEER may take to act upon such submissions or resubmissions.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall not have any right to an extension of time on account of

delays due to his failure to submit his requests for the required information or the required approval in accordance with these requirements.

1.13 ADJUSTMENT BY OWNER

A. From time to time it may be necessary for the Contract schedule and/or Contract Times to be adjusted by the OWNER due to the effects of job conditions, acts or omissions of other contractors not directly associated with this contract, weather, technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the OWNER or his representatives, and other enforceable conditions which may indicate schedule adjustments and/or completion time extension. Under such conditions, the ENGINEER shall direct the CONTRACTOR to reschedule the work to reflect the changed conditions, and the CONTRACTOR shall revise his schedule accordingly. Schedule extensions affecting the Contract Times shall be granted only by the OWNER in writing. It is specifically pointed out that the use of available total float in the CPM schedule may be used by the OWNER and his representatives, as well as, by the CONTRACTOR.

B. Without obligation to extend the Contract Times or any intermediate completion

dates set out in the CPM network, the OWNER may initiate changes to the Contract work that absorb float time only. OWNER-initiated changes that affect the critical path on the CPM network shall be the sole grounds for extending or shortening the Contract Times. CONTRACTOR initiated changes that encroach on the float time, identified in the CPM network, may be accomplished with the OWNER's concurrence. Such changes, however, shall give way to OWNER-initiated changes competing for the same float time.

01311-11 9/2015

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

01311-12 9/2015


01500-1 9/2015

SECTION 01500

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY

A. The facilities and controls specified in this section are considered minimum for the Project. The CONTRACTOR may provide additional facilities and controls for the proper execution of the Work and to meet CONTRACTOR’s responsibilities for protection of persons and property.

1. Comply with applicable requirements specified in other sections of the

Specifications. 2. Maintain and operate temporary facilities and systems to assure continuous

service.

3. Modify and extend systems as Work progress requires.

4. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required.

5. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or to

original condition. 1.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduct operations in strict accord with applicable Federal, State and local safety codes and statutes and with good construction practice. The CONTRACTOR is fully responsible and obligated to establish and maintain procedures for safety of all work, personnel and equipment involved in the Project.

B. Observance of and compliance with the regulations shall be solely and without

qualification the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR without reliance or superintendence of or direction by the OWNER’s representative. Immediately advise the OWNER of investigation or inspection by Federal Safety and Health inspectors of the CONTRACTOR or Subcontractor's work or place of work on the job site under this Contract, and after such investigation or inspection, advise the OWNER of the results. Submit one copy of accident reports to the OWNER within 10 days of occurrence.

Protect areas occupied by workmen using the best available devices for detection of lethal and combustible gases. Test such devices frequently to assure their

01500-2 9/2015

functional capability. Constantly observe infiltration of liquids into the Work area for visual or odor evidences of contamination, immediately take appropriate steps to seal off entry of contaminated liquids to the Work area.

Safety measures, including but not limited to safety personnel, first-aid equipment, ventilating equipment and safety equipment, in the specifications are obligations of the CONTRACTOR.

Maintain required coordination with the City's Police and Fire Departments during the entire period covered by the Contract.

1.3 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT

A. Provide a first aid kit throughout the construction period. List telephone numbers for physicians, hospitals, and ambulance services in each first aid kit.

B. Have at least one person thoroughly trained in first aid procedures present on the

site whenever Work is in progress. 1.4 SECURITY MEASURES

A. Protect all Work materials, equipment, and property from loss, theft, damage, and vandalism. CONTRACTOR's duty to protect property includes OWNER’s property used in connection with the performance of the Contract.

B. If existing fencing or barriers are breached or removed for purposes of

construction, provide and maintain temporary security fencing equal to existing. 1.5 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES

Prevent damage to existing public utilities during construction. The location of existing sewer, water or gas lines, conduits, underground cables or other structures across or along the line of the proposed work may vary from the locations shown on drawings provided by the OWNER and, where shown, the locations depth and dimensions of such structures are approximately correct and may vary. The CONTRACTOR shall use extra care when working in the areas where existing lines have been designated, and will be solely liable for repair in the event of damage. Give owners of these utilities at least 48 hours notice before commencing Work in the area, for locating the utilities during construction, and for making adjustments or relocation of the utilities when they conflict with the proposed Work.

It is the CONTRACTOR’S responsibility to notify and coordinate with Miss Utility of Central Virginia (1-800-552-7001) prior to beginning construction.

01500-3 9/2015

1.6 PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY

A. Preventive Actions.

1. Take precautions, provide programs, and take actions necessary to protect the Work and public and private property from damage.

2. Take action to prevent damage, injury or loss, including, but not be limited

to, the following:

a. Store apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in an orderly, safe manner that will not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or the Work of any other Contractor, any utility service company, or the OWNER’s operations.

b. Provide suitable storage for materials, which are subject to damage by

exposure to weather, theft, breakage, or otherwise.

c. Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety of that portion of the Work.

3. Frequently clean up refuse, rubbish, scrap materials, and debris caused by

construction operations, keeping the Project site safe and orderly.

4. Provide safe barricades and guard rails around openings, for scaffolding, for temporary stairs and ramps, around excavations, elevated walkways, and other hazardous areas.

5. Obtain written consent from proper parties before entering or occupying

privately-owned land with workers, tools, materials or equipment,.

6. Assume full responsibility for the preservation of public and private property on or adjacent to the site. If any direct or indirect damage is done by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in execution of the Work by the CONTRACTOR, it shall be restored by the CONTRACTOR to a condition equal to or better than that existing before the damage was done.

B. Barricades and Warning Signals

1. Where Work is performed on or adjacent to any roadway, right-of-way, or public place, furnish and erect barricades, fences, lights, warning signs, and danger signals; and take other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and protection of the Work. Use barricades painted to be visible at night. From sunset to sunrise, furnish and maintain at least one light at each barricade. Erect sufficient barricades to keep vehicles from

01500-4 9/2015

being driven on or into Work under construction. Maintain barricades, signs, and lights until the Project is accepted by the OWNER.

2. CONTRACTOR to provide a watchman at all places where the work causes

obstructions to normal traffic, excavation sites, or constitutes in any way a hazard to the public.

3. Statutory Requirements: Install and maintain all barricades, signs, lights, and

other protective devices within highway rights- of- way in strict conformity with City traffic control requirements.

C. Tree and Plant Protection

1. When working in a street or adjacent to private property where there are trees, shrubs or vegetation, the CONTRACTOR shall take every precaution to protect and prevent unnecessary damage to the trees, shrubs, or vegetation. This shall include, but is not limited to, boarding or wrapping of trunks or tying back of limbs. In the course of the Work, should it become necessary to cut roots or limbs, the cuts shall immediately be painted with a paint approved by the OWNER.

2. Leave lawn areas in as good condition as before the start of the work.

Restore areas where sod has been removed, by seeding or sodding.

D. Protection of Existing Structures

1. Underground Structures:

a. Underground structures are defined to include, but not be limited to, sewer, water, gas, and other piping, and manholes, chambers, electrical and signal conduits, tunnels, and other existing subsurface installations located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work.

b. Drawings provided by the OWNER contain data relative to existing

public utility installations and structures above and below the ground surface. Existing public utility installations and structures are indicated on provided drawings only to the extent such information was made available to, or found by, the OWNER in preparing the drawings. These data are not guaranteed for completeness or accuracy, and the CONTRACTOR is responsible for making necessary investigations to become fully informed as to the character, condition, and extent of all public utility installations and structures that may be encountered and that may affect the construction operations.

c. Explore ahead of trenching and excavation work and uncover obstructing underground structures sufficiently to determine their

01500-5 9/2015

location, to prevent damage to them and to prevent interruption of utility services. Restore to original condition damages to underground structures at no additional cost to the OWNER.

d. Necessary changes in location of the Work may be made by the

OWNER to avoid unanticipated underground structures.

e. Contact utility locating service sufficiently in advance of the start of construction to avoid damage to the utilities and delays to the completion date.

2. Surface Structures:

a. Surface structures are defined as existing buildings, structures and other constructed installations above the ground surface. Included with such structures are their foundations or any extension below the surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to buildings, tanks, walls, bridges, roads, dams, channels, open drainage, piping, poles, wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, guard cables, fencing, and other facilities that are visible above the ground surface.

b. Assume and accept responsibility for all injuries or damage to

culverts, building foundations and walls, retaining walls, or other structures of any kind met with during the prosecution of the work. Assume and accept liability for damages to public or private property resulting therefrom. Adequately protect against freezing all pipes carrying liquid.

3. Protection of Underground and Surface Structures:

a. Support in place and protect from direct or indirect injury to underground and surface structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Install such supports carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure. Before installing structure supports, CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the OWNER that the methods and procedures to be used have been approved by the owner of the structure.

b. Avoid moving or in any way changing the property of public utilities

or private service corporations without prior written consent of a responsible official of that service or public utility. Representatives of these utilities reserve the right to enter within the limits of this project for the purpose of maintaining their properties, or of making such changes or repairs to their property that may be considered necessary by performance of this Contract.

01500-6 9/2015

c. Notify the owners and/or operators of utilities and pipelines of the nature of construction operations to be performed and the date or dates on which those operations will be performed. When construction operations are required in the immediate vicinity of existing structures, pipelines, or utilities, give a minimum of 5 working days advance notice. Probe and flag the location of underground utilities prior to commencement of excavation. Keep flags in place until construction operation reach and uncover the utility.

d. Assume risks attending the presence or proximity of underground and

surface structures within or adjacent to the limits to the Work including but not limited to damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by his Work to any structure. Immediately repair damage caused, to the satisfaction of the owner of the damaged structure.

4. Work on Private Property

a. CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements, at no additional cost to the OWNER, for temporary use of private properties, in which case CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR’s surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the OWNER against claims or demands arising from such use of properties outside of rights-of-way.

E. Protection of Installed Products.

1. Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed, prior to completion of Work.

2. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces.

1.7 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. During Construction:

1. Keep the site of the Work and adjacent premises free from construction materials, debris, and rubbish. Remove this material from any portion of the site if such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a nuisance or is objectionable.

2. Remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary structures when they are no longer needed.

01500-7 9/2015

3. Neatly stack construction materials such as concrete forms and scaffolding when not in use. Promptly remove splattered concrete, asphalt, oil, paint, corrosive liquids, and cleaning solutions from surfaces to prevent marring or other damage.

4. Properly store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from

the site daily.

5. Do not bury or burn on the site or dispose of into storm drains, sanitary sewers, streams, or waterways, any waste material. Remove all wastes from the site and dispose of in a manner complying with applicable ordinances and laws.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

A. Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction as necessary for controls over environmental conditions at the construction site and adjacent areas.

B. Comply with statutes, regulations, and ordinances that relate to the proposed Work

for the prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources.

C. The OWNER recognizes that the site has considerable natural value and that

construction of projects should have minimum impact to the surrounding environment. The CONTRACTOR shall adopt construction procedures that do not cause unnecessary excavation and filling of the terrain, indiscriminate destruction of vegetation, air or stream pollution, nor the harassment or destruction of wildlife.

D. Recognize and adhere to the environmental requirements of the Project. Disturbed

areas shall be strictly limited to boundaries established by the OWNER. Particularly avoid pollution of "on-site" streams, sewers, wells, or other water sources.

E. Burning of rubbish, debris or waste materials is not permitted.

F. CONTRACTOR is responsible for liming of sewage spill as soon as possible.

Pelletized lime to be used in areas where wastewater is flowing. Hydrated lime to be used in areas of stagnant wastewater spills.

1.9 POLLUTION CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations.

01500-8 9/2015

B. Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to

contain any spillage, and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local regulations, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil.

C. Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters.

Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, or other such substances adjacent to streams, or in sanitary or storm sewers.

D. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants.

1. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. 2. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere.

E. Use equipment during construction that conforms to current Federal, State, and

local laws and regulations. 1.10 NOISE CONTROL

A. Provide vehicles, equipment, and construction activities that minimize noise to the greatest degree practicable. Noise levels shall conform to the latest OSHA standards and City Ordinances and in no case will noise levels be permitted which interfere with the Work of the OWNER or create a nuisance in the surrounding residential neighborhoods.

B. Conduct construction operations during daylight hours except as approved by

OWNER.

C. Select construction equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If in the opinion of the OWNER, objectionable noise or vibration is produced by equipment, rectify such conditions without additional cost to the OWNER. The Sound Power Level (PWL) of any equipment shall not exceed 85 dbA (re: 10-12 watts) measured 5 feet from the piece of equipment, or the levels prescribed by City Ordinances, whichever is lower. Explicit equipment noise requirements are specified with equipment specifications.

1.11 DUST CONTROL

A. Control objectionable dust caused by operation of vehicles and equipment. Apply water or use other methods, subject to approval of the OWNER, which will control the amount of dust generated.

01500-9 9/2015

1.12 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE PROVISIONS

A. Provide for the drainage of stormwater and any water applied or discharged on the site in performance of the Work. Provide adequate drainage facilities to prevent damage to the Work, the site, and adjacent property.

B. Supplement existing drainage channels and conduits as necessary to carry all

increased runoff from construction operations. Construct dikes as necessary to divert increased runoff from entering adjacent property (except in natural channels), to protect the OWNER's facilities and the Work, and to direct water to drainage channels or conduits. Provide ponding as necessary to prevent downstream flooding.

C. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping

equipment. 1.13 WATER RUNOFF AND EROSION CONTROL

A. Where required, the CONTRACTOR shall comply with the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination system (NPDES) permit as stated in the Federal Register, Vol.57, No. 175.

B. In addition to the NPDES requirements, the CONTRACTOR shall conform to the

requirements in Section 02010 - Erosion and Sediment Control.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

01500-10 9/2015


01564-1 9/2015

SECTION 01564

WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01300 – Submittals.

B. Obtain and submit disposal permits for proposed disposal sites if required by federal, state and local ordinances.

C. Submit a copy of written permission from property owner, along with description

of property, prior to disposal of excess material adjacent to the Project. Submit a written and signed release from property owner upon completion of disposal work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXCESS MATERIAL

A. Vegetation, rubble, broken concrete, debris, asphaltic concrete pavement, excess soil, and other materials not designated for salvage, shall become the property of CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from the job site and legally disposed of.

B. Non-contaminated excess soil may be deposited on private property adjacent to the

Project when written permission is obtained from property owner.

C. Waste materials shall be removed from the site on a daily basis, such that the site is maintained in a neat and orderly condition.

END OF SECTION

01564-2 9/2015


01611-1 9/2015

SECTION 01611

STORAGE OF MATERIALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of Specifications.

B. CONTRACTOR shall make all arrangements and provisions necessary for the

storage of materials and equipment. All excavated materials, construction equipment, and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be placed so as not to injure any part of the Work or existing facilities and so that free access can be available at all times to all parts of the Work and to all public utility installations in the vicinity of the Work. Materials and equipment shall be kept neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause a minimum of inconvenience to other CONTRACTORS, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants and occupants. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any theft of stored materials.

C. The OWNER shall approve areas available on the construction site for storage of

material and equipment.

D. Lawns, grass plots or private property shall not be used for storage purposes without written permission of the OWNER or other person in possession or control of such premises.

E. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for loss or damage to stored materials

and equipment.

F. Do not open manufacturer’s containers until time of installation unless recommended by the manufacturer or otherwise specified.

1.2 STORAGE

A. Provide covers impervious to water for products which may be damaged by water. Tie down covers with rope and slope covers to prevent accumulation of water.

1.3 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE

A. Maintain a periodic system of inspection of stored products to assure that products exposed to elements are not adversely affected.

01611-2 9/2015

B. Required environmental conditions are maintained on a continuous basis.

C. Products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

01789-1 9/2015

SECTION 01789

CONTRACT CLOSE OUT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittals

B. Record Drawings

C. Warranties and Bonds

D. Spare Parts, Special Tools, and Maintenance Products

E. Substantial Completion

F. Releasing Completed Work for Use

G. Final Cleaning

H. Final Inspection

I. Certificate of Final Completion 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01610- Transportation and Handling of Materials and Equipment 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Certificates: Prior to Preliminary Substantial Completion Inspection, submit manufacturer's certificates confirming that materials and products have been properly installed and are ready to be placed in service.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Prior to Preliminary Substantial Completion

Inspection, submit all operation and maintenance manuals and data required for proper operation and maintenance of products and equipment.

C. Project Record Documents: Project record documents required by this Section

shall be submitted prior to beginning the Substantial Completion Inspection.

D. Prior to Final Inspection:

01789-2 9/2015

1. Provide submittals to the OWNER that are required by governing or other authorities.

2. Submit Bonds, Warranties, Guarantees and similar documents.

3. Submit spare parts in accordance with this section.

E. Upon receipt of the Certificate of Final Completion submit Final Application for

Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

F. Submit to the OWNER, with the Final Application for Payment, a sworn affidavit

that all labor, service, materials, and Subcontractors have been paid and that there are no suits pending in connection with the Work done or labor and materials furnished under the Contract.

1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. At the site keep and maintain one record copy of the following Contract Documents, reference documents and all technical documents.

1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Using drafting symbols and standards consistent with the original documents,

annotate Contract Drawings neatly and clearly in color to show all changes made during the construction period.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an as-built survey sealed by a Professional

Land Surveyor at the completing of the CONTRACT. Field locate and provide coordinates for the utilities relocated and new construction features including but not limited to sewers, manholes, curb inlets, etc. installed as part of this project. On Record Drawings, legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:

1. Location, size, material, invert elevations for piping, concealed and exposed;

as well as location, size, invert and top elevations for manholes. 2. Size and routing of conduits.

3. Size and location of pull boxes and number and type of conductors installed

therein.

01789-3 9/2015

4. Changes in product and equipment dimensions, structural openings, foundations.

5. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work.

6. Field changes of dimensions and detail.

7. Details not on original drawings.

8. Any other variations between the work actually provided and that shown on the Contract Drawings.

9. Change Order Work.

E. Annotated drawings are to be made available to ENGINEER for reference at all

times. Provide annotated drawings to be reviewed monthly at the time of payment application. Should the annotated drawings be found not current with the work, an additional retainage of one percent of the total application amount will be deducted from the monthly payment. Such additional retainage will be released in future payments if the drawings are brought current.

F. At completion of the CONTRACT and before final payment is made, deliver to the

ENGINEER one set of clearly readable, reproducible Contract Drawings reflecting all changes made during construction. Mark each drawing "Record Drawing" in ink.

1.5 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Prior to final payment deliver to the OWNER the original and one copy of all bonds, warranties, guarantees and similar documents, including those customarily provided by manufacturers and suppliers which cover a period greater than one year. Show OWNER as beneficiary of these documents. Begin warranty periods from the Date of Substantial Completion or the Date of Final Completion when Substantial Completion is not required by the OWNER.

1.6 SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Furnish spare parts in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Arrange for delivery of these items to the ENGINEER immediately prior to final inspection of the work. Provide to the ENGINEER an itemized list on delivery of each spare part or special tool which matches the identification tag attached to each item. At this time, the OWNER will inventory the spare parts and special tools. If the inventory is not complete or some items are damaged, provide the missing items and replace damaged items.

01789-4 9/2015

B. No spare parts or special tools will be accepted by the ENGINEER until notice of final inspection unless the ENGINEER expressly requests the advance delivery of items. When so requested, deliver such items to the ENGINEER. Deduct items delivered in advance from the inventory and furnish the ENGINEER with signed receipts for items delivered in advance along with the final inventory list.

C. Furnish special tools and lubricating equipment in accordance with this Section

and individual specification sections. Special tools are considered to be those tools which, because of their limited use, are not normally available but which are necessary for maintenance of particular equipment.

D. For each type of equipment provided under this CONTRACT, furnish a complete

set of all special tools which may be needed for the adjustment, operation, maintenance, and disassembly of such equipment. Furnish only tools of high grade, smooth forged alloy tool steel.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an enclosed weather-proof and lighted facility

for storage of spare parts and special tools during the construction period.

F. Store and be responsible for spare parts and special tools until acceptance by the ENGINEER.

G. Deliver all items to a location as directed by the ENGINEER.

H. Include the cost of all spare parts and special tools and the storage and delivery

thereof in the Contract Item for each material and equipment item. No separate payment will be made therefor.

1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. When the CONTRACTOR considers the entire work to be substantially completed in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the work may be beneficially occupied for the purposes for which it was intended, the CONTRACTOR shall, in writing to the OWNER and ENGINEER, certify that the entire work is substantially complete and request that the ENGINEER issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion for the work. The OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the work to determine the status of completion. If the ENGINEER does not consider the work substantially complete, the ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing giving his reasons thereof. If the ENGINEER considers the work substantially complete, the ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to the OWNER a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a list of tentative items to be completed or corrected before final payment. It is mutually agreed that the CONTRACTOR will be responsible for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat utilities, and insurance until final payment.

01789-5 9/2015

B. INSPECTION

1. General: The work shall be subjected to continuous inspection and also two formal Substantial Completion inspections for each Phase of the work requiring Substantial Completion. The two formal Substantial Completion inspections are Preliminary Substantial Completion Inspection and Substantial Completion Inspection. The CONTRACTOR in the presence of the ENGINEER shall perform each inspection. All required labor, materials, equipment, instruments, lubricants and incidentals necessary to perform these inspections shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR. Before proceeding to the next inspection, all discrepancies and deficiencies observed during each inspection shall be noted and corrected and, if directed by the ENGINEER, the inspection shall be rescheduled and repeated at no additional cost to the OWNER.

a. Refer to individual specification sections for specific requirements for

placing equipment and systems in operation.

b. Notification: When the CONTRACTOR considers the Work ready for each inspection, the CONTRACTOR shall so notify the ENGINEER in writing for each inspection. Each inspection shall be performed by the ENGINEER within 10 days after receipt of the request.

2. Preliminary Substantial Completion Inspection:

a. Perform a preliminary inspection to demonstrate that individual

components of the work and equipment have been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Perform required tests, identify deficiencies to be corrected and incomplete Contract items to be completed prior to the SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION. This may require one or a series of preliminary inspections and test procedures for each component included in the Contract.

b. All project Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be received

prior to beginning the PRELIMINARY SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION.

c. The ENGINEER will prepare a TENTATIVE LIST OF DEFICIENT

ITEMS to be accomplished prior to performing the SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION.

3. Substantial Completion Inspection:

a. Perform a SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION to fully

demonstrate to the ENGINEER that all individual project components

01789-6 9/2015

function as required by the Contract Documents and that all systems are internally coordinated, as well as coordinated with other systems. Verify to the ENGINEER that correction of the deficiencies noted in the PRELIMINARY SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION have been accomplished. Equipment shall be operated and required system tests performed. In addition, it shall demonstrate that all major site work has been brought to final configurations and restoration initiated.

b. Manufacturer's authorized representatives shall be present at this

inspection.

c. All project Record Drawings shall be received prior to beginning the SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION.

d. The ENGINEER will prepare a LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS to be

accomplished prior to performing the Final Inspection. 1.8 RELEASING COMPLETED WORK FOR USE

A. It is the intent of these Specifications that all newly constructed Work be placed in use as rapidly as it can be constructed, inspected and accepted and placed in service for its intended use. Arrange operations to permit access to all such parts of the Work by the OWNER and other contractors for the OWNER.

B. Taking over of parts of the Work for operation before completion of the entire

Contract shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of any responsibility for proper integrated operations of all parts of the Work, nor shall it act to relieve him of any responsibilities under the Contract except as follows:

1. When parts of the Work are accepted by the ENGINEER in advance of the

date of acceptance of all the Work and such Work is taken over for use by the OWNER, the starting date for the guaranty period shall be the date the Work is taken over for use by the OWNER.

2. The ENGINEER will issue certificates describing the Work which is taken

over for use by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall furnish all maintenance and guarantee information of manufacturers or suppliers that is applicable to the Work being taken over for use.

1.9 FINAL CLEANING

A. Removal of CONTRACTOR's Materials: At the conclusion of the Work, promptly take away all erection plant, tools, temporary structures and materials belonging to the CONTRACTOR. Remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other foreign substances.

01789-7 9/2015

B. Cleaning Materials and Equipment: Thoroughly clean all materials installed and clean all existing structures, materials or equipment soiled during construction and deliver over such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright, clean and polished condition.

1.10 FINAL INSPECTION

A. When the CONTRACTOR considers the entire work complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, in writing to the OWNER and ENGINEER, certify that the entire work is complete and request that the ENGINEER issue a Certificate of Final Completion for all work included in the Contract Documents. Within ten calendar days thereafter, the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make a FINAL INSPECTION of the work to determine the status of completion. If the ENGINEER considers the work complete, the ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to the OWNER a Certificate of Final Completion which shall fix the Date of Final Completion for all work identified in the Contract Documents.

B. If the ENGINEER does not consider the work complete, the ENGINEER will issue

to the CONTRACTOR a LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS to be completed in accordance with the Contract Documents to achieve Final Completion. This list identified as the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS may be added to at the OWNER's discretion for work not completed in conformance with the contract documents and shall include all incomplete work items previously identified in the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS issued with the Certificate of Substantial Completion for the entire work.

1.11 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION

A. The Work will be deemed complete as of the date set by the CONTRACTOR if, upon Final Inspection, the ENGINEER determines that no further work, physical or otherwise, is required to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Upon determination that all Work is completed, the ENGINEER will issue a Certificate of Final Completion. This Certificate of Final Completion shall serve as CONTRACTOR's authorization to generate a requisition for final payment.

B. However, if such inspection, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, reveals items of

Work still to be performed, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly perform them and then request a reinspection. In the event the ENGINEER then determines that the Work is complete, the date of final completion shall be deemed to be the last day of such reinspection.

C. The OWNER may at it's sole discretion issue a Certificate of Final Completion for

signature by the OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR; following the expiration of the time fixed for completion in the Contract or the time for completion as modified through a change order to the contract even though such

01789-8 9/2015

items of work as identified in the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS are not complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any items identified on the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS which have not been completed in accordance with the contract documents within the time fixed for completion in the Contract or the time for completion as modified through a change order to the contract shall be identified on the Certificate of Final Completion as incomplete and shall be credited to the OWNER based solely on the OWNER's determination of the cost of such items; and, an adjustment to the total contract value shall be made via a change order to the contract at the OWNER's discretion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

Special Project Provisions 01800-1 5/2017

SECTION 01800

SPECIAL PROJECT PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes information and details specific to the Annual Sewer Investigation Services for Capital Improvements Projects. This information takes precedence over other detailed sections of the Specifications.

1.2 SAFETY

A. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct operations in accordance with applicable OSHA, VOSHA, VDOT, City of Richmond and other governing regulations or standards.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall adopt and abide by all requirements of the City’s Health, Safety and Environmental Management Plan (Refer to Exhibits).

C. The CONTRACTOR shall adopt and abide by all VDOT work zone safety and traffic management training, planning and maintenance requirements.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall adopt and abide by the Code of Virginia, Chapter 30,

Overhead High Voltage Line Safety Act.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall handle water supplied to/from hydrants, cleaning trucks, boilers and other equipment in a manner that does not present a hazard to traffic or pedestrians during cold weather. Any clean water spills or leakage onto sidewalks or streets shall be promptly corrected. These corrections may include immediately stopping the spillage/leakage and applying deicer and sand to affected areas.

1.3 NATURE AND CHARACTER OF ASSIGNMENTS:

A. No guarantee is made about the number, size or value, or type of scope of projects that may be assigned under this contract. Note that the volume of work depends, in part, on the CONTRACTOR’S capacity to complete and close assignments in a timely manner.

B. The quantities noted in the price schedule are provided for the purpose of obtaining a menu of fixed prices to be used for establishing assignment costs once scopes of work are defined. Therefore, the CONTRACTOR should bid all items to “stand alone” or in any combination (i.e., “mix of work”) that may be required to execute scopes of work defined subsequent to the bid.


C. The primary focus of this annual contract is to inspect and clean sewer pipes and

related structures to support capital improvement projects.

D. The Bidder/CONTRACTOR should be aware of site conditions typically found in the assignments. This list is for information only, and is not intended to be complete or accurately represent all assignments.

1. A relatively high number of break-in and/or protruding taps tend to be found

in most assignments.

2. Structurally deteriorated pipe (much of it concrete) requires special care in cleaning.

3. In the City environment traffic control devices are often required beyond the

minimum signs and cones.

4. Work must be scheduled so as not to conflict with special events such as running events/competitions, bike races, charity walks, racetrack events, neighborhood and church events, etc.

5. Buried or paved-over manholes tend to be found in many assignments.

6. The system contains brick manholes with narrow chimneys.

7. Hard deposits and some roots are frequently encountered.

8. Work in Streets Permits (WISPs) are normally required for each assignment.

9. The collection system contains a number of noncircular shapes, including

eggs, boxes, and arches.

10. A number of pipes are accessed through small alleyways.

11. Approximately 1/3 of the collection system is combined sewer and stormwater piping (beginning as small as 12” diameter).

1.4 PERMITS

A. Railroad Permits: In coordination with the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall apply for and obtain any permits required by railroads. Prior to commitment to requirements of the railroad, CONTRACTOR shall obtain OWNER’s written approval of project plans and any costs associated therewith. Written approval from the OWNER’s representative shall be required prior to incurring cost and planning work activities associated with the railroad. The OWNER shall pay the cost of permits, flagmen and railroad protective liability insurance on a cost-plus 15% basis as Related Extra Work.


B. Work in Streets Permit (WISP): A WISP will be required for all assignments. The

CONTRACTOR will obtain these permits, compensation for which is included in mobilization bid items. Contact the Department of Permits and Engineering Services, Room 110, City Hall, 900 East Broad Street, Richmond, VA 23239 for information regarding the cost of WISP permits.

C. Water Meters and Backflow Preventers: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay

the cost of water meters and backflow preventers and pay the cost of any bond or permits required by the City Water Department. Meters shall be read on a periodic basis as required by the City Water Department. The cost of water shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR on a direct cost basis with no markup (i.e., cost of water as shown on City invoices to the CONTRACTOR).

D. Debris Disposal: Any permits associated with transportation of debris to the

WWTP site will be paid by the CONTRACTOR. Disposal of sanitary debris removed from sewers will be provided at no cost to the CONTRACTOR as described in Section 02760. Disposal of all other debris shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR.

E. VDOT Land Use Permit: Where access to VDOT land requires an application and

permit, the cost of the permit, additionally required bonds or insurance and additionally required traffic control shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR on cost-plus 15% basis as Related Extra Work.

F. Cost-Plus: Any reference to cost-plus in this Section refers to direct “out-of-

pocket” costs paid to other entities by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR’s costs of managing the permits process (including use of its own forces, subcontractors or agents) are not reimbursable costs.

1.5 MINIMUM NUMBER OF CREWS

A. A minimum number and type of crews are required to maintain adequate progress on assignments and address urgent work as governed by the volume of work required by the City. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a minimum of: one (1) CCTV crew with at least one (1) additional crew for peak demand; one (1) CCTV and Clean crew with at least one (1) additional crew for peak demand. At least the minimum number of crews shall be made available as governed by the volume of work assigned. Payment will not be made for crews the CONTRACTOR may, at its discretion, be considered to be waiting or on standby for work.

1.6 TIME PROVISIONS & LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. Time is of the essence, whether projects are programmed or un-programmed. Therefore, the CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate supervision, field crews and equipment as needed to complete the work without undue delay. The CONTRACTOR shall begin work on projects deemed by the City to be urgent in


nature. Once work is started, the CONTRACTOR must maintain adequate resources to progress toward completion without interruption. The City may agree to extend these limits based on the nature and size of the assignment(s). Urgent work will take precedence over other assigned work. Failure to satisfactorily execute urgent projects may result in fewer or delayed CIP assignments (i.e., routine assignments), negative Vendor Performance Reports (VPRs), or other corrective action.

B. In order to complete the various projects under this contract within the allowed

time, the CONTRACTOR may be required to work on more than one location simultaneously. The provisions of this contract remain in force for the period necessary to complete any work assigned prior to the expiration of the contract period.

C. Each assignment shall be managed as individual contracts with regard to schedule

commitment, execution, and liquidated damages. As the CONTRACTOR receives assignments on an ongoing basis, commitment dates and schedules shall be agreed upon and adjusted according to the City’s priorities of work. Liquidated damages in the amount specified in the Invitation for Bid will apply to each assigned project not completed within the agreed upon time.

1.7 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE

A. The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

1. The OWNER intends to use a third-party Construction Manager (CM) to act as the OWNER's agent during the construction of the project. The successful bidder will receive instructions from the OWNER clarifying the specific duties between the Engineer and Construction Manager, specifying among other matters the channels of communication to be used by the CONTRACTOR.

2. Where portions of the specification indicates “ENGINEER” or “OWNER” or “CITY” relative to coordination and administration of construction contracts on behalf of the OWNER, inspection of the Work, coordination of third-party testing services contracts procured by the OWNER, construction administration, and providing other construction management services on behalf of the OWNER, these terms shall be considered interchangeable with CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

1.8 MBE/ESB COMMITMENT BY ASSIGNMENT

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a written commitment of MBE/ESB participation as the specific scope of work of each assignment is identified.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide monthly compliance reports to the City, with

copy to the City’s project manager.


1.9 SUPERVISION OF WORK:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate supervision of and coordination between all internal and subcontractor crews to ensure work is performed safely, on schedule, and according to specified requirements. This supervision shall be provided by qualified individuals and shall include time on jobsites commensurate with the requirements of installations. Inadequate supervision shall be grounds for removal and replacement of supervisors or project managers at the discretion of the Owner. Repeated failure to provide adequate supervision may result in other actions, including temporary suspension of work or contract termination.

B. Work schedules shall be coordinated with the Owner to ensure that required field

inspection by the Owner is provided. CONTRACTOR schedules may require adjustment based on field inspector availability, especially in cases where the CONTRACTOR provides short notice of schedule changes or requests night, weekend, or holiday inspection.

1.10 PROJECT EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

A. Schedules: Master schedules, which include all assignments, shall be formatted as specified. Cost loading and submittal with invoices is not required for the Annual Contract. A Gantt chart (i.e., a time-scaled logic diagram) format acceptable to the OWNER shall be updated and submitted on a weekly basis. Substantial and final completion dates of each assignment shall be included in all submittals.

B. Coordination: The CONTRACTOR shall schedule and effectively coordinate all

activities to ensure quantities and costs of related work items and inspection are minimized.

C. Clarification Requests: During the work the CONTRACTOR may request

clarification of the information presented in the Contract Documents or Assignments. Such requests for information (RFI) shall be in writing on a Request for Information form. The final format for the Request for Information form will be provided to the CONTRACTOR at the preconstruction meeting.

D. Paved Over or Buried Manholes: CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for locating

manholes and pipelines at no additional cost to the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall review plans, related information, and CCTV survey inspection videos (when available and provided by the OWNER) to locate manholes and other access points, regardless of depth, using CCTV, locator equipment and any other means necessary. Uncovering and raising of frames and covers will be paid separately under applicable line items. CONTRACTOR is responsible for any site clearing and restoration associated with accessing manholes. The cost of clearing and restoration is not separately paid and is included in work items as detailed in Section 01150.


E. Receipts and Invoices: Quantities shall be confirmed with the OWNER’S representative on no less than a monthly basis using a provided City Receipt form. Once approved by the CONTRACTOR and OWNER’S representative, the OWNER’S representative will submit the Receipt for approvals and processing. In parallel to submission of the Receipt, the CONTRACTOR submits an Invoice to accounts payable.

F. Assignment Closeout: Each assignment shall be treated as a separate contract with

regard to closeout Section 01789 - Contract Close Out. Items required in this section shall be submitted to close out each assignment in a timely manner according to final completion dates set forth in each assignment.

END OF SECTION

02010-1 9/2015

SECTION 02010

EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, construct, maintain and replace all erosion and sediment control features specified and required by the OWNER, the local sediment control inspectors, any other regulatory agency which has control or jurisdiction over erosion and sedimentation control in the area in which the project is located and Virginia Soil and Water Conservation Commission in the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining all erosion and sediment control permits required prior to any land disturbing operations.

B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections Includes:

1. Section 02110 - Clearing, Grubbing and Site Restoration. 2. Section 02220 - Excavation and Backfill.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Codes and Standards: CONTRACTOR shall reference the latest edition of the code or standard at the time of project advertisement or assignment. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified:

1. Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, Latest Edition. 2. Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Regulations. 3. Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Law. 4. Virginia Storm Water Management Regulations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit Erosion and Sediment Control plan showing details of erosion and sediment control devices and locations. Submittal information shall comply with requirements of regulatory agency which has jurisdiction over erosion and sediment control in the area in which the project is located. Submit

02010-2 9/2015

technical data, manufacturer’s literature and catalog information for the products specified.

2. Submit copies of approved Erosion and Sediment Control permits from

appropriate governing jurisdictions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Temporary Silt Fence: Silt fencing shall be furnished as specified in the latest edition of "Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook" Standard and Specification 3.05.

B. Temporary Sediment Trap: Temporary sediment trap outlets shall be as specified

in the latest edition of "Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook" Standard and Specification 3.13.

C. Temporary Diversion Dike: Provide temporary diversion dikes as specified in the

latest edition of "Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook" Standard and Specification 3.09.

D. Temporary Gravel Construction Entrance: Temporary gravel construction

entrances shall be furnished in accordance with the latest edition of "Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook" Standard and Specification 3.02.

E. Temporary Tree Protection: Provide fencing as specified in the latest edition of

"Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook" Standard and Specification 3.38, Section 8.

F. Temporary Storm Drain Inlet Protection: Storm drain inlet protection shall be

furnished in accordance with the latest edition of "Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook" Standard and Specification 3.07.

G. Permanent Level Rip Rap Aprons: Rip rap shall be furnished as specified in the

latest edition of "Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook," Standard and Specification 3.18.

H. Erosion Control Blankets: Erosion Control Blankets, Excelsior or equivalent shall be furnished as specified in the latest edition of "Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook" Standard and Specification 3.36.

02010-3 9/2015

PART 3 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE

3.1 TEMPORARY PRACTICES

A. Silt fencing, diversion dikes, yard inlet protection, temporary sediment traps, and temporary construction entrances shall be installed as shown and specified in the latest edition of "Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook."

3.2 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE SEQUENCING

A. Erosion and sediment control practices and measures shall be constructed prior to any land disturbing activity. They shall be maintained in accordance with the latest edition of "Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook" and local ordinances. They shall be removed only upon completion of all land disturbing activities.

B. All disturbed areas including but not restricted to stock piles, dams, banks of

sediment basins and temporary road banks left unprotected for more than 30 days shall be temporarily seeded at the CONTRACTOR’S expense. All disturbed areas shall be protected to control erosion and prevent sedimentation of adjacent properties, storm sewers and/or streams.

C. Sediment control devices such as diversion berms, sediment traps, filter berms,

vegetation stabilization, etc., shall be used to prevent off-site sedimentation at all times.

D. All borrow and/or spoil materials shall only be stockpiled within the limits of the

permitted site.

E. The proposed grading shall not impair existing surface drainage, constitute a potential erosion hazard, or source of sedimentation to any adjacent property, drainage system or right-of-way.

F. All points of construction ingress and egress shall be protected to prevent tracking

of mud on the public streets.

G. Storm drainage pipe discharges shall be diverted to temporary sediment traps. Rip rap aprons shall be constructed during sediment trap removal.

H. Upon completion of all construction activities, and upon stabilizing all areas

disturbed by construction activities, remaining temporary sediment control devices shall be removed. Silt fencing shall be installed downhill of sediment traps prior to their removal. Sediment trap areas shall be restored to pre-existing grades and stabilized prior to removing silt fencing.

02010-4 9/2015

I. Upon removal of temporary erosion and sediment control features, the construction site shall be inspected for remaining disturbed areas. Stabilize any remaining disturbed areas.

END OF SECTION

02110-1 9/2015

SECTION 02110

CLEARING, GRUBBING AND SITE RESTORATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to perform all clearing, grubbing, site restoration, fencing, guardrail installation, curbs, and gutters within the limits of work as specified and required by the OWNER.

B. All unpaved areas disturbed by the CONTRACTOR’S operations shall be restored

with topsoil, fertilizer, seed, lime and mulch in accordance with the latest edition of VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

C. Related Work Specified in Other Sections Includes:

1. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls 2. Section 02010 - Erosion and Sediment Control 3. Section 02220 - Excavation and Backfill.


A. Codes and Standards: State and local laws and code requirements shall govern the hauling and disposal of trees, shrubs, stumps, roots, rubbish, debris and other matter and the final restoration of the site. CONTRACTOR shall obtain all permits required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fertilizer:

1. Fertilizer shall be of standard commercial quality containing nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash in a 1:2:1 ratio, shall be packed in the properly labeled manufacturer's standards bags and each bag shall not weigh in excess of 100 pounds. Labeling shall consist of manufacturer's name, net weight of contents, type of material, and a guaranteed analysis on each container. The fertilizer shall be stored in a weather proof storage area. Material that has become caked or otherwise damaged will be rejected.

02110-2 9/2015

B. Seed:

1. All seed shall meet requirements of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook Standard and Specification 3.32, and be delivered in original unopened packages. Seed shall be certified by the Virginia Crop Improvement Association or the certifying agency in other states. Each package shall be guaranteed 95 percent pure and having an analysis showing the following: Kind, Variety, Lot No., Lab Test No., Lab Test Date, Pounds, Purity Percent, Germination Percent and Weed Seed Percent. Packages which do not contain analysis certificates will not be accepted.

2. Seed shall have a minimum germination rate of 85 percent within one year

of test.

3. Permanent Seeding Mix shall be in accordance with Table 3.32-D of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, for General Slope Conditions.

4. Permanent seeding after October 16 will only be allowed if weather

conditions permit and with approval of the OWNER. Seeding shall not be performed when the ground is frozen, or when soil and weather conditions would prevent proper soil preparation.

5. Temporary vegetation shall be used to stabilize temporary diversion dikes

and disturbed areas that will not be brought to final grade within 30 days, in accordance with Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook Standard and Specification 3.31.

C. Mulch:

1. Hay for mulching shall be of mowings of acceptable herbaceous growth, which is free from noxious weeds; normally materials that are low grade and unfit for farm use are acceptable. The weight shall be calculated on the basis of the material not having more than 15 percent moisture content.

2. Straw for mulching shall be stalks of oats or wheat crops that are free from

noxious weeds. Normally materials that is unfit for farm use is acceptable for mulch. The weight shall be calculated on the basis of the material not having more than 15 percent moisture content.

D. Lime:

1. Lime shall be agriculture grade palletized or pulverized limestone. Lime shall be applied as directed by the OWNER, generally apply palletized lime where potential run-off is possible to adjacent water. Pulverized lime shall be used on level areas.

02110-3 9/2015

2. Lime source shall be registered with and approved by the Virginia

Department of Agriculture and Commerce in accordance with the Virginia Agricultural Lime Law and shall conform to VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

E. Fencing:

1. Fence material shall conform to Section 507 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

2. CONTRACTOR to match and replace existing fencing distributed by work

at no additional cost to OWNER.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Limits of clearing shall be limited to areas required by the Work. Damage outside these limits resulting from the CONTRACTOR'S operations shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR's expense.

B. Except as noted below, CONTRACTOR shall remove from the site and

satisfactorily dispose of all trees, shrubs, stumps, roots, brush, masonry, rubbish, scrap, debris, pavement, curbs, fences and miscellaneous other structures not covered under other Sections as specified or otherwise required to permit construction of the Work.

C. Trees, stumps and other cleared and grubbed material shall be disposed of off the

site of the Work at no additional cost to the OWNER. No cleared or grubbed material may be used in backfills or structural embankments.

D. No on-site burning will be allowed unless approved by authorities having

jurisdiction.

E. Trees and shrubs shall be trimmed when doing so will avoid removal or damage. Trimmed or damaged trees shall be treated and repaired by persons with experience in this specialty who are approved by OWNER. Trees and shrubs intended to remain which are damaged beyond repair or removed, shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR.

F. CONTRACTOR must comply with all City Ordinances on removal of trees and

must coordinate with the City’s Urban Forestry Department prior to tree removal.

02110-4 9/2015

3.2 TOPSOIL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A. Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Topsoil shall be substantially free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material.

B. Strip topsoil which is satisfactory to whatever depths are encountered, and in such

manner as to prevent intermingling with the underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping.

1. Where trees are directed to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping a

sufficient distance from such trees to prevent damage to the main root system in accordance with the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, Specification 3.38.

C. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas approved by the OWNER. Construct

storage piles to freely drain surface water. Cover storage piles if required to prevent windblown dust. Topsoil in excess of quantity required shall be removed from the site at the CONTRACTOR’S expense. Silt fence shall be installed at the base of the stockpile.

D. Topsoil stockpiles remaining undisturbed for 30 days or more shall be temporarily

seeded in accordance with the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, Specification 3.31.

E. Preparation for installation of topsoil:

1. Loosen subgrade of areas to receive topsoil to a minimum depth of 4 inches

by discing, harrowing or other approved method to permit bonding of the topsoil to the subgrade. Operate the equipment used to scarify the subsoil so the ridges and depressions are parallel to the contours.

2. Remove stones over 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish

and other extraneous matter.

F. Installation of topsoil:

1. Topsoil shall be installed in accordance with Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, Standard and Specification 3.30, and as specified herein.

2. Place and spread topsoil, over all unpaved areas disturbed during

construction and as directed by the OWNER, to a minimum depth of 4 inches after natural settlement and light rolling, in a manner that the

02110-5 9/2015

completed work conforms to the lines and grades of the pre-construction ground surface.

3. Do not compact topsoil, except for light rolling.

4. After the topsoil is spread, remove all large, stiff clods, rocks, roots or other

foreign matter over 2 inches.

5. Apply soil amendments, as required by machine over all areas receiving topsoil, to bring the soil to a neutral pH. Work lightly into the top 3 inches of topsoil.

6. Manipulate topsoil to attain a properly drained surface.

7. Grade topsoil areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniform, fine

texture.

8. Roll and rake and remove ridges and fill all depressions, ruts, low spots or unsuitable areas which result after settlement so that the area is suitable for subsequent work.

3.3 LIMING, FERTILIZING, SEEDING, MULCHING, HYDROSEEDING

A. Liming:

1. Lime shall be uniformly spread at the rate of 2 tons per acre on areas to be seeded prior to the areas being loosened or roughened.

B. Fertilizing:

1. Fertilizer shall be evenly spread at the rate of 1,500 pounds per acre of area and lightly worked in by an approved method.

C. Seeding:

1. Seeding shall be performed in accordance with the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook Standards 3.31 and 3.32, or as specified herein. All areas where topsoil has been placed, all areas where topsoil already exists but requires reworking, and other regraded or disturbed areas within the Work limit shall be seeded. Seeded areas shall be maintained until a satisfactory growth is obtained. All grassed areas on which the grass is destroyed by operation of the CONTRACTOR shall be restored as specified above at his own expense.

2. Seed shall be evenly spread at the rate of at least 7 pounds of pure live seed

per 1,000 square feet of area and shall be lightly raked into the ground to a

02110-6 9/2015

depth not to exceed 1/4-inch by any approved method. After seed placement, the area shall be rolled.

3. The CONTRACTOR will, at his own expense, be responsible for all

maintenance, watering, weeding and repair of failures, to the seeded areas. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to protect the seeded areas by whatever method he deems necessary until acceptance of the seeded areas by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for producing a satisfactory healthy stand of grass consisting of all the types of grass seeds sown.

D. Mulching:

1. Straw or hay mulch shall be applied at the rate of 2 tons per acre in such a manner so that not more than 10 percent of the soil surface is left exposed. No seeded areas may be left unmulched for a period of more than 48 hours. After the end of 48 hours, the areas which were not mulched shall be reseeded.

2. Straw or hay mulch shall be anchored in accordance with the Virginia

Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook Standard Specification 3.35. Asphalt shall not be used to anchor mulch.

E. Hydroseeding:

1. CONTRACTOR may at his option spread fertilizer, seed and mulch with hydroseeding equipment.

2. CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER for approval seed, fertilizer

and mulch substitutes required for hydroseeding.

3. Liquid fertilizer shall be applied on a poundage basis, mixed with the same volume of water that would be used with dry fertilizer.

4. Wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be applied at a rate of approximately

1,500 pounds net dry weight per acre and in such a manner to obtain a uniform distribution of mulch.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain topsoiled areas by filling in erosion rills and correcting drainage as required.

B. Maintain the topsoil in a loose, friable condition until the area is reseeded in

accordance with the requirements herein.

02110-7 9/2015

C. Maintain seeded areas until final acceptance but in no case less than 60 days after planting.

3.5 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION

A. Conform to requirements specified in Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

3.6 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL

A. Conform to requirements specified in Section 02010 - Erosion and Sediment Control.

3.7 FENCING

A. Conform to Section 507 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications and VDOT Standard FE-CL.

3.8 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. When site restoration work is completed, including maintenance, the OWNER will make an inspection to determine acceptability.

B. Where inspected work does not comply with the requirements, replace rejected

work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by the OWNER found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from the Project site.

END OF SECTION

02110-8 9/2015


02150-1 9/2015

SECTION 02150

BYPASS PUMPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, construct, maintain and operate bulkheads, plugs, hoses, piping, and pumps to bypass sewage flow in gravity sewers or force mains while maintenance or construction operations are in progress. The flow shall be diverted by pumping around the construction location to a downstream manhole. Bypass pumping shall prevent backup or overflow onto streets, yards and unpaved areas or into buildings, adjacent ditches, storm sewers, and waterways, without diverting sewage outside of the sewer system. The CONTRACTOR shall provide full redundancy for the bypass system.

B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections Includes:

1. Section 02651 - Television Inspection 2. Section 02760 - Cleaning of Sewers


A. The bypass system shall meet the requirements of all codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for damage due to sewer backup or overflow onto streets, yards and unpaved areas or into buildings, adjacent ditches, storm sewers, and waterways. Violations from sewage spills shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the OWNER to determine the type and number of pumps to be used. For bypass pumping systems of gravity sewers and force mains, CONTRACTOR shall submit, prior to installation, a detailed plan and description outlining all details and provisions of the temporary bypass pumping system. The plan shall be specific and complete, including such items as schedules, locations, elevations, capacities of equipment, materials and all other incidental items necessary and/or required to insure proper operation of the bypass pumping system, including protection of the access and bypass pumping locations from damage due to the discharge flows, ability to pump dry weather and wet weather flows, and compliance with the requirements and permit conditions

02150-2 9/2015

specified in these Contract Documents. No bypass pumping shall begin until all provisions and requirements have been reviewed and approved.

C. The bypass pumping plan shall include but not limited to the following:

1. Staging areas for pumps; 2. Flow stoppage system, including pipe and channel plugging method and

types of plugs;

3. Number, size, material, location and method of installation of pump suction piping;

4. Number, size, materials, method of installation and location of installation of

discharge piping;

5. Bypass pump sizes, capacity, number of each size to be on site and power requirements;

6. Calculations of static lift, friction losses, and flow velocity (pump curves

showing pump operating range shall be submitted);

7. Size and location of standby power generator, if required;

8. Downstream discharge plan;

9. Restraining lengths for piping;

10. Any temporary pipe supports and anchoring required;

11. Calculations for selection of bypass pumping pipe size;

12. Schedule for installation of and maintenance of bypass pumping lines;

13. Plan indicating selection location of bypass pumping line locations;

14. Road crossing details;

15. Protection against main breaks;

16. Method of noise control for each pump and/or generator;

17. Staffing Plan;

18. Refueling Plan;

02150-3 9/2015

19. Fencing Plan;

20. Traffic Control Plan.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Design piping, joints, and accessories to withstand at least twice the maximum system pressure or 50 psi, whichever is greater.

B. Pumps shall be self-priming type or submersible electric, in good working order,

with a working pressure gauge and a flowmeter on the discharge. Pumps shall meet the requirements of the City of Richmond Noise and Sound Level Regulations. Select project equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. All pumps shall have Critical Silenced enclosures. Sound Power Level (PWL) readings shall not exceed 69 dbA measured 30 feet from the pump. All power must be supplied by the CONTRACTOR. All pumps used must be constructed to allow dry running for extended periods of time to accommodate the cyclical nature of sewer flows.

C. Provide automatic Stop/Start and electronic level based controls for all pumps.

Provide a cellular auto-dialer set to notify key personnel if pump speed increases past a set-point or pump failure as defined by the OWNER.

D. CONTRACTOR shall provide stand-by pumps of adequate capacity.

2.2 FENCING

A. Provide independently supported 6 foot chain link fence around pumps.

2.3 LEVEL SENSORS

A. Provide level sensors that are able to accurately and dependably detect changes in water level in increments of 0.01 feet.

B. The pumps shall be provided with an electronic level control system to start and stop stand-by pump and to adjust pump speeds in response to water level changes.

02150-4 9/2015

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND MAINTENANCE

A. Any time the bypass pumping system is operating, an experienced operator shall be on-site to monitor the operation, adjust pump speed, valves, etc., make minor repairs to the system and report problems.

B. During bypass pumping, do not allow sewage to be leaked, dumped, or spilled in

or onto any area outside of the existing sewer system. The bypass pumping system shall be 100% water tight. Undercutting required due to sewage leakage into excavation will not be paid for by the OWNER.

C. In the event of accidental spill or overflow, immediately stop the discharge and

take action to clean up, disinfect the spill and promptly notify the OWNER.

D. Prevent back-up of sewage in sewer laterals within the areas of pipe being repaired and/or replaced.

E. In the event of rain, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the operation of

bypassing with the OWNER.

F. High flow conditions may require the CONTRACTOR to temporarily suspend work. Days on which work has been suspended shall not be considered working days and no additional compensation will be provided by the OWNER.

G. Spare parts for each type of pump and piping shall be kept on site as required.

H. CONTRACTOR shall provide daily fuel services for the bypass pumping system.

The refueling plan shall include fuel tank location, size, and containment systems. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

A. CONTRACTOR shall locate the bypass pipelines to minimize any disturbance to existing utilities and shall obtain approval of the pipeline locations from the OWNER.

B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for traffic control around the pumping area.

CONTRACTOR shall submit a traffic control plan to the OWNER for approval prior to bypass pumping operation.

C. During all bypass pumping operation, the CONTRACTOR shall protect existing

structures and equipment from damage inflicted by any equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all physical damage to the existing structures and equipment caused by human or mechanical failure.

02150-5 9/2015

D. When working inside existing structures, the CONTRACTOR shall exercise caution and comply with all federal, state and local occupational safety and health standards when working in the presence of gases, combustible or oxygen-deficient atmospheres, and confined spaces.

E. The pipeline must be located off streets and sidewalks and on shoulders of the

roads. When the bypass pipeline crosses streets and driveways, the CONTRACTOR must place the bypass pipelines in trenches and cover with temporary pavement. Upon completion of the bypass pumping operations, and after the receipt of written permission from the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall remove all the piping, restore all property to pre-construction condition and restore all pavement.

F. When bypass pumping operations are complete, piping shall be drained into the

sewer prior to disassembly.

END OF SECTION

02150-6 9/2015


02513-1 9/2015

SECTION 02513

PAVEMENT AND SITE RESTORATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, supervision, and incidentals to restore the surface and the base of the roads included in the work to its original condition or in a manner suitable to the OWNER. The thickness, type and extent, of the surface to be replaced shall be the same thickness as that removed, or damaged during construction, unless otherwise directed or specified.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment,

supervision, and incidentals to furnish, apply, and maintain sod in areas designated by the OWNER until final acceptance by the OWNER.

B. Virginia Department of Transportation Specifications:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all work in accordance with the applicable sections of the Virginia Department of Transportation Road and Bridge Specifications, latest edition, and all addenda, revisions, supplemental conditions and other requirements of the Virginia Department of Transportation. These specifications are available online at the VDOT’s website: http://www.virginiadot.org/business/const/spec-default.asp.

2. Utilize proper sign layout and channelization devices (i.e., cones, plastic

barrels, pavement marking, etc.) during construction, according to VDOT's Virginia Work Area Protection Manual.

C. City of Richmond, Department of Public Works Specifications:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all work in accordance with the applicable sections of the City of Richmond, Department of Public Utilities Specifications, latest edition, and all addenda, revisions, supplemental conditions and other requirements of the City of Richmond, Department of Public Works.

2. Restoration of surface on City's Right of Way (ROW) shall be in accordance with the City of Richmond's Department of Public Works (DPW) "Standard Requirements for Repaving Utility Repairs".

02513-2 9/2015


A. Testing Laboratory:

1. CONTRACTOR shall provide testing laboratory, services conforming to Section 01411 - Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by CONTRACTOR.

2. Testing Laboratory shall perform all tests required by VDOT.

3. Testing Laboratory shall perform in-place density tests as specified in

Paragraph 3.5.B. conforming to ASTM D2922 and D2950.

B. Reference Standards: Comply with the latest revision of the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, unless otherwise directed or specified.

1. Virginia Department of Transportation, Road and Bridge Specifications. 2. ASTM D2922, Tests for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In Place by

Nuclear Methods.

3. ASTM D2950, Test for Density of Bituminous Concrete In Place by Nuclear Methods.

4. Virginia Department of Transportation, Minimum Standards of Entrances to

State Highways.

5. Virginia Department of Transportation, Road and Bridge Standards.

6. U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), Latest Edition.

7. The Virginia Department of Transportation, Virginia Supplement to

MUTCD, Latest Edition.

C. In addition to the requirements stated in the Virginia Department of Transportation Specifications, the following requirements supplement, add to or modify those Specifications and shall govern in all conflicting cases.

1. Applicable Standards: The work shall be done in accordance with the

following: a. City of Richmond, Departmental Standards Drawing N-14000 (Sheets

1-25). b. Latest Edition of City of Richmond Sewer Specifications.

02513-3 9/2015

c. City of Richmond Standard Specifications for Gas, Water System,

Construction and Maintenance DPU No. 1-92.

d. Bureau of Traffic Engineering, Traffic Order #2265 dated January 17, 1973, Traffic Control Specifications for street and sidewalk construction.

e. Bureau of Traffic Engineering, Work Area Traffic Control Handbook

dated September 1988 (Volume 1 – Narrative & Illustrations and Volume 2 – Traffic Control Layouts).

f. Latest rules and regulations governing construction, demolition and

excavation as adopted by the Safety Codes Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia.

g. Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, Virginia Department of

Conservation and Recreation and Division of Soil and Water Conservation.

1.3 VIRGINIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION ROAD & BRIDGE

SPECIFICATIONS – MODIFICATIONS: ADDITIONAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

A. In the event of a conflict between the referenced VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications and the modifications thereto listed below, the below listed modifications shall govern.

B. Section 303 is amended as follows:

1. Excavation: All excavation encountered shall be considered unclassified, shall consist of the removal of all materials encountered not specifically provided for or included as a part of other bid items as indicated on the drawings and shall include undercut excavation regardless of depth.

2. Side slopes shall be trimmed to neat lines and even surfaces with tops hand

raked to a rounded edge and slopes on a 2:1 where practical.

3. Where fill or backfill is required, it shall be made with suitable material obtained from the project excavation if available. VDOT No. 21A stone shall be used as a backfill material for work in paved areas (streets, roadways etc.) as specified in Section 02220 - Excavation and Backfill. Should the CONTRACTOR dispose of excavated material to the extent that sufficient material is unavailable for fill purposes, extra payment will not be made for furnishing the required borrow. All fill areas shall be compacted to 95% of AASHTO T 99 maximum density.

02513-4 9/2015

C. Section 315 is amended as follows:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall lay bituminous concrete on one-half of the roadway at a time. When laying the first half of the roadway, traffic will be maintained on the opposite side of the street. Traffic will not be allowed on the newly laid surface until it has cooled and been rolled sufficiently in the opinion of the Engineer.

2. Flagmen or off-duty Police Officers shall be provided, if requested by the

Engineer. If Flagmen are requested by the Engineer and not provided, the work will be suspended until they are placed on the job.

3. Before the laying of the base is started in any block, the CONTRACTOR

shall verify that all castings are to the proper grade. Manhole and valve box frames shall meet or be not more than a quarter of an inch below a sixteen (16') foot straightedge laid on the finished pavement parallel to the center of the street.

4. After the surface has been laid, the CONTRACTOR shall pour cutback

asphalt around the top of the adapter and tops if necessary. Asphalt paint applied to the curb lines shall not show more than one (1") inch above the finished pavement grade. Any curbs marred by excess asphalt shall be cleaned by the CONTRACTOR at his expense. Curbs marred or broken by the CONTRACTOR's equipment shall be repaired or replaced at the CONTRACTOR's expense.

5. When padding driveways a one (1") inch board shall be laid in the flow line

of the gutter, and the padding shall be rolled before removing the boards. These boards shall be held in a straight line while rolling the ramp.

D. Stripping: The CONTRACTOR shall strip old asphalt paving where directed by

the Engineer, either to investigate the base or to make the desired tie-in at intersecting streets. In cutting tie-ins only one-half of the street can be cut out at a time and padding placed on that half before cutting the other half of each side of the intersection.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit proposed job mix formula for approval giving complete data on materials; including source, location, percentages, temperatures, and all other pertinent data.

02513-5 9/2015

B. Material Certificates:

1. Submit certificates for the following:

a. Coarse and fine aggregates from each material source and each required grading.

b. Asphalt or tar cement for each penetration grade.

c. Job-mix design mixtures for each material or grade.

d. Density of uncompacted bituminous concrete.

e. Density of compacted bituminous concrete.

f. Density and voids analysis for each series of bituminous concrete

mixture test specimens.

g. Bituminous concrete plant inspection.

2. Certify that materials, mixtures and plant comply with Specification requirements.

3. Certificates signed by CONTRACTOR.

C. Soil Tests: Submit soil test results.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Use weather limitations in the VDOT Standards for the following:

1. Application of bituminous prime coat. 2. Construction of base and surface courses.

B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades, including

crown and cross-slope for each course during construction operations.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. General: Deliver, store and handle all products and materials as specified in Division 1 and as follows:

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. General: Maintain all sodded areas during the warranty period.

02513-6 9/2015

B. Sod Areas: Maintain all sodded areas to well establish a uniform stand of weed-free grass. Reseed areas failing to develop a uniform stand.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Aggregate, mineral filler, bitumen, and prime coat shall be in accordance with the VDOT specifications.

2. Aggregate includes stone, gravel, slag and sand.

3. Mineral filler includes limestone dust, Portland cement, or other inert

material.

4. Bitumen includes asphalt and tar cement.

5. Prime coat includes asphaltic cutback, tar or asphalt emulsion.

B. Aggregate Base Course: Material for the aggregate base course shall be Type II aggregate base material, dense graded aggregate Size 21B and conforming with the applicable portions of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, Sections 203 and 208.

C. Asphalt Concrete Base Course: Materials for the asphalt concrete base course

shall be Type BM-25.0 conforming to the applicable portions of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, Section 211.

D. Seal Coat, Prime Coat and Tack Coat: Material for seal coat, prime coat and tack

coat shall conform to the applicable requirements of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, Section 210.

E. Asphalt Concrete Surface Course: Bituminous concrete surface course shall be

VDOT Type SM-9.5 D material conforming to the applicable requirements of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, Section 211.

2.2 PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIALS

A. Traffic lane marking paint with chlorinated rubber base.

B. Factory mixed, quick drying and nonbleeding, FS TT-P-115, Type III.

C. Color: Shall be as existed prior to removal of the pavement.

02513-7 9/2015

D. Thermoplastic pavement marking material shall be Type B, Class I in accordance with VDOT Specifications Section 246.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the subgrade on which pavement shall be installed. Notify the OWNER in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the OWNER.

3.2 SITE MAINTENANCE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall have no more than one hundred and fifty feet of street or easement where the trench has been backfilled which has not been cleaned up. If this length is exceeded the OWNER may stop the work unit the clean up is caught up.

B. Construction Staging Area: The CONTRACTOR shall do the following:

1. Locate trailers and equipment as far as possible from nearby occupied

dwellings. 2. Keep the site neat and policed so that debris will not be transported to

neighboring properties by wind or other means.

3. Start construction equipment only when necessary in the mornings.

4. Do not leave construction equipment running needlessly.

5. Caution workmen to speak quietly and to use language that would not offend citizens in the area.

6. Locate portable sanitary facilities on a secluded or concealed portion of the

site.

7. Where appropriate, provide lighting and/or fencing to make access to the site during non-working hours more difficult.

8. When storing construction materials insure that they do not have a tendency

to become unstable.

9. Where dust may be a nuisance, provide means for dust control.

02513-8 9/2015

10. Backfill adjacent to and behind sidewalk and curb and cutter immediately after stripping forms.

11. Access shall be maintained to all properties by the CONTRACTOR. The

cost of maintenance stone will be borne by the OWNER except in cases of negligence on the part of the CONTRACTOR as determined by the Engineer.

3.3 ADJUSTING UTILITIES AND CASTINGS

A. Resetting Castings: The CONTRACTOR shall be required to adjust sewer manhole castings, gas, water valve and drip boxes to new grades. For large valve and drip boxes the vertical adjustment shall be made with brick and cement mortar. The entire base of the box shall be placed on brick when set to new grade. For small valve boxes the vertical adjustment is made by screwing the top section and/or by installing a new mid section.

1. Sewer manhole castings shall be reset to grade on brick with cement mortar.

Virginia Power and telephone manhole castings will be reset by the respective utility. Old pavement removed to adjust gas, water valve and drip boxes and sewer manhole castings shall be replaced with similar pavement on graded streets.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall properly place and fit the sewer rings and

adapters. Rings and adapters improperly placed shall be cut out and replaced at the CONTRACTOR's expense.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall remove all materials which he causes to fall in

the sewer manholes and basins and reset all castings the day the castings are disturbed. Work shall not be resumed the next day on any new work if the CONTRACTOR has failed to clean out any sewer manhole or basin and reset the castings of previous day's work until such time as previous day's work is complete.

4. Concrete collars around sewer manhole castings and valve boxes shall be

Class "A3" Type I or II cement and shall be protected from traffic for three (3) days. Backfill for valve boxes set to grade shall be compacted with a pneumatic tamp to a minimum of ninety-five (95%) percent density (Proctor).

5. On ungraded streets, whose final surface shall be concrete, castings, gas,

water valve and drip boxes shall be set to grade at outline above without concrete collar.

B. Adjusting Utilities: In the event any existing gas or water lines, fire hydrants or

services have to be adjusted, the CONTRACTOR will be required to notify the

02513-9 9/2015

Department of Public Utilities seventy-two (72) hours prior to the time set for uncovering the existing lines, adjusting hydrants, or adjusting service boxes. Any adjustment to gas-water lines or fire hydrants will be done by the Department of Public Utilities' forces. Uncovering lines will be done by this CONTRACTOR.

C. Adjusting or Constructing Basin Slabs

1. Basin Slabs: Where required, variable size of monolithic curb, gutter and

basin slab, or slit open inlet adaptable to sub-basins and catch basins or drop inlets shall be constructed as shown in the City of Richmond's Departmental Standard Drawing N-14000.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION

A. Aggregate Base Course:

1. Furnish and place the aggregate base course in conformance with the lines, grades, and cross section to match that of the existing pavement. Perform in accordance with applicable portions of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, Section 309.

2. Construct the aggregate base to the depth required or directed and within

0.04 foot of the top of the aggregate base course elevation derived from the existing grade elevations.

B. Prime Coat and Tack Coat:

1. Apply prime coat to the aggregate base course prior to placing the asphalt concrete base course or the asphalt concrete surface course. Apply tack coat between the layers of asphalt concrete base course and the asphalt concrete surface course.

2. The method of application of the tack coat and prime coat shall conform to

the applicable requirements of Sections 310 and 311, respectively, of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

3. Prime coat material shall be RC-70 applied at 0.4 gallons per square yard.

4. Tack coat material shall be RC-250 applied at 0.1 gallons per square yard.

5. The rate of application and type of asphalt material for prime coat or tack

coat may be modified by VDOT or by the Engineer to produce optimum results based on the actual materials used and prevailing conditions during construction.

C. Asphalt Concrete Subbase and Base Course:

02513-10 9/2015

1. Furnish and place hot mixed asphalt concrete base course on the completed

aggregate base course in conformance with the lines, grades, and cross sections to match that of the existing pavement and in accordance with the applicable portions of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, Section 315.

2. A prime coat shall be applied to the aggregate base course prior to placing

the asphalt concrete base course and a tack coat shall be applied between layers of the asphalt concrete base course.

3. Asphalt concrete base course thickness tolerance shall be in conformance

with the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, Sections 315.07. The elevation of the base course shall not deviate by more than 0.04 foot from the top of the final base course elevation derived from the grade elevations of the existing pavement.

D. Asphalt Concrete Surface Course:

1. Furnish and place hot mixed asphalt concrete surface course on the asphalt concrete base course in conformance with the lines, grades, and cross sections of the existing pavement, or approved by the OWNER.

2. Thickness or application rate shall be as specified herein.

3. The asphalt concrete surface course shall be constructed in accordance with

the applicable requirements of the Section 315 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

E. Crushed Stone Roadway:

1. Conform to the applicable requirements of Para. 3.5.A. of these Specifications.

F. Shoulder Restoration:

1. Shoulder restoration shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 305 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

G. Repair of Asphalt Surface Treatment:

1. Damaged asphalt surface treatment shall be repaired in accordance with Section 315 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

2. Backfill shall be select material, placed in 4-inch layers, and compacted with

pneumatic tampers to 95 percent Standard Procter Density.

02513-11 9/2015

3. Aggregate base shall be 1-1/2 times the existing aggregate base depth or 8 inches in depth, whichever is greater.

4. Asphalt or cement concrete base courses shall be placed to match existing.

5. The area shall then be primed using RC-250 at the rate of 0.35 gallon per

square yard and covered with No. 68 stone at the rate of 25 pounds per square yard. After completion of the prime work, the area will then be sealed using CAE-2 at the rate of 0.3 gallon per square yard and covered with No. 78 stone at the rate of 25 pounds per square yard. This treatment shall match the existing pavement elevation and cross section and result in a smooth riding surface.

3.5 PAVEMENT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. General: In addition to other specified conditions, comply with following minimum requirements:

1. Provide final surfaces of uniform texture, conforming to the grades and

cross sections required or directed or matching that of the existing pavement.

B. Density:

1. If directed by the Engineer, compare density of in-place material against laboratory specimen or certificates on same asphalt concrete mixture. Use nuclear devices.

2. Minimum acceptable density of in-place course material will be 90 percent

of the recorded laboratory specimen or certificate density. Maximum acceptable density will be 98 percent.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thicknesses shall equal or exceed the thickness

directed or specified. D. Surface Smoothness:

1. Test finished surface of each asphalt concrete course for smoothness, using a

10-foot straightedge applied parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved areas.

2. Check surfaced areas at intervals directed by Engineer.

3. Surfaces will not be acceptable if deviations exceed the following:

a. Base Course: 3/8 inch in 10 feet. b. Surface Course: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

02513-12 9/2015

c. Crowned Surfaces:

(1) Test crowned surfaces with a crown template, centered and at right angles to the crown.

(2) Surfaces will not be acceptable if varying more than 1/4 inch

from the template. 3.6 MILLING ASPHALT PAVEMENT

A. Description: The work covered by this section consists of milling asphalt pavement at locations, depths, widths, and typical sections indicated in the plans. The work also includes removing, transporting, and disposing of the milled material; and cleaning the milled pavement surface.

The milled material shall become the property of the Contractor. All milled material shall be disposed of by the Contractor in areas provided by him which are outside the right of way, except where the milled material is used in the work.

B. Equipment: Equipment shall include a self propelled unit capable of removing the existing asphalt pavement to a depth of 2 inches. The equipment shall have been designed and built exclusively for pavement milling operations and shall have sufficient power, traction, and stability to accurately maintain depth of cut and slope. The milling machine shall be equipped with a grade control system which will automatically control the longitudinal profile and cross slope of the milled surface by the use of one or more skid sensors moving along the pavement surface. The machine shall be capable of leaving a uniform surface suitable for handling traffic without excessive damage to the underlying pavement structure. The milling machine and other loading equipment shall be capable of loading milled material to trucks. Additional equipment necessary to satisfactorily remove the pavement in the area of manholes, water valves, curb and gutter, and other obstructions shall be provided.

The milling equipment shall be equipped with a means of effectively limiting the amount of dust escaping from the removal operation in accordance with local, State, and Federal air pollution control laws and regulations.

C. Construction Requirements: The existing pavement shall be milled in a manner

which will restore the pavement surface to a uniform longitudinal profile and cross section in accordance with typical sections shown in the plans and existing profiles. The Contractor may elect to make multiple cuts to achieve the required depth of cut.

02513-13 9/2015

The longitudinal profile of the milled surface shall be established by a mobile string line on the side of the cut nearest the centerline of the road or as directed by the Engineer. The cross slope of the milled surface shall be established by an automatic cross slope control mechanism or by a second skid sensing device located on the opposite edge of the cut. The Engineer may waive the requirement for automatic grade and cross slope controls where conditions warrant.

D. The milling equipment shall be operated in such a manner as to prevent damage to the underlying pavement structure, utilities, drainage facilities, curb and gutter, paved surfaces outside the milled area, and any other appurtenances. The milled pavement surface shall be reasonably smooth and free of excessive scarification marks, gouges, ridges, continuous grooves, or other damage as determined by the Engineer. Any leveling or patching required as a result of negligence by the Contractor shall be repaired with hot asphalt plant mix at no cost to the City and in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall adjust manholes, meter boxes, and valve boxes with the milling operation.

E. The Engineer may require remilling of any area exhibiting defects such as

laminations or defects. The Contractor will not be paid for remilling. F. The milled pavement surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose aggregate

particles, dust, and other objectionable material by the use of power brooms, power blowers, power vacuums, or other means.

G. The pavement removal operations shall be conducted to effectively minimize the amount of dust being emitted. The operation shall be planned and conducted so that it is safe for persons and property adjacent to the work including the traveling public.

3.7 PATCHING

A. As directed by the OWNER, remove and replace all defective areas. Square cut such areas and apply a tack coat, and fill with material matching existing road surface. Compact to the required density.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Cleaning: After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled asphalt materials and all foreign matter.

B. Protect newly finished pavement until it has become properly hardened.

C. Protect openings of drainage structures in the area of paving until permanent

coverings are placed.

02513-14 9/2015

3.9 MARKING PAVEMENT

A. Cleaning:

1. Sweep surface with power broom supplemented by hand brooms to remove loose material and dirt.

2. Do not begin marking pavement until approved by Engineer.

B. Application:

1. Using mechanical equipment, provide uniform straight edges in two separate coats. Apply in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended rates.

C. Locations:

1. Pavement to be marked in accordance with the markings which existed prior to removal or damage of the pavement.

2. Pavement markings at entrances to Residuals Storage Facilities shall comply

with VDOT Standards. 3.10 CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS

A. Curbs and Gutters: Curbs and gutters shall conform to Section 502 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

B. Restoration of concrete curbs and gutters, sidewalks and driveways shall be done

in full section. Patching or piecing of blocks will not be permitted. C. Permanent Driveways: The CONTRACTOR is advised that all existing permanent

driveways on the project are to be removed and replaced with new concrete driveway crossing when so designated on the contract drawings or when new curb and gutter is to be installed as part of this contract. A permanent driveway shall be defined as a curb cut on a street which has existing curb or curb and gutter. All other driveways shall be considered temporary driveways and the property owner will be required to obtain a permit from the OWNER for a permanent driveway which shall be installed during construction of the project. The property owner may elect to have the CONTRACTOR install the new permanent driveway or secure another contractor of his or her choice.

D. Salvage of Sidewalk Brick, Granite Spall, Cobblestone, Granite Curb, Durax

Block, And Other Building Materials: All salvaged materials are to be salvaged and removed to OWNER approved storage area. CONTRACTOR responsible for loss or damage of material salvaged during removal and storage. All salvaged materials are to be handled with due care to avoid breakage and chipping. Granite curb is to be carefully stacked with wooden strips between layers.

02513-15 9/2015

CONTRACTOR to replace lost or damaged salvaged materials at no cost to the OWNER. Removal of salvaged materials to designated storage areas and proper storage at those areas will be paid for under specific bid items.

E. Brick Sidewalk on Concrete Base

1. General: The work of this section shall comprise the furnishing, installing

and restoration of brick sidewalk as noted on the contract drawings. Brick for new sidewalks and sidewalks that replace existing concrete sidewalks shall be a North Carolina Common or an approved equal. Bricks for reconstructed brick sidewalks shall consist of the existing bricks within the area or areas of brick sidewalk designated on the contract drawing as brick sidewalk improvement.

2. Preparation of Subgrade: The subgrade for new brick sidewalks,

reconstructed brick sidewalks, and sidewalks that replace existing concrete sidewalks shall be prepared by the removal and satisfactory disposal of all unsuitable material above the normal subgrade. All unsuitable material shall include existing concrete sidewalk. Any material removed above normal subgrade shall be disposed of by the CONTRACTOR in an area approved by the OWNER. No tree roots encountered above normal subgrade will be cut unless approved by the Engineer.

a. Wherever the existing ground surface is below normal subgrade, the

ground surface shall be brought up to normal subgrade with a suitable material approved by the Engineer. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for supplying all material required to bring the existing ground surface up to normal subgrade and shall be part of the bid price for sidewalk.

b. Subgrade shall be compacted to a theoretical density of 95% at

optimum moisture and shall be graded off to a surface that will not vary more than 1/2" at any one point from normal subgrade. Wherever tree roots prevent excavation of existing ground surface to normal subgrade, subgrade will be determined by the Engineer in the field.

3. Concrete Base: Upon compaction and grading of subgrade, the subgrade

shall be cleaned of all loose and foreign material before the concrete bedding is poured. After this has been done, a 4" concrete slab shall be placed on the compacted subgrade.

4. Laying Brick: Bricks shall be stored in areas designated by the Engineer.

All bricks shall be carefully laid with the best face up in the pattern noted on the contract drawings or designated by the Engineer. Bricks shall be cut, not broken; using a high-speed masonry saw producing clean, sharp edges.

02513-16 9/2015

5. The bricks shall be laid on a 1/2" mortar bed with 1/8" joints between bricks.

A 1:3 cement-sand mixture shall be swept into the joints between bricks and lightly sprayed with water. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for removing all excess cement-sand mixture from surface of sidewalk prior to spraying water.

F. Brick Sidewalk on Cement-Sand Bedding

1. Description: The term Brick Sidewalk shall refer to the removal and

replacement of existing concrete sidewalks and brick sidewalks with all new bricks set on a sand cement bed as noted on the contract drawing.

2. Brands of Brick: Brick for new sidewalks and sidewalks that replace

existing concrete sidewalks shall be a North Carolina Common or approved equal.

3. Preparation of Subgrade: The subgrade for new brick sidewalks and

sidewalks that replace existing concrete sidewalks shall be prepared by the removal and satisfactory disposal of all unsuitable material above the normal subgrade. Unsuitable material shall include existing broken concrete sidewalk and existing brick sidewalk. Any material removed above the normal subgrade shall be disposed of by the CONTRACTOR in an area approved by the Engineer. Tree roots encountered above normal subgrade shall not be cut unless approved by the Engineer.

4. Wherever the existing ground surface is below normal subgrade, and a

property wall exists, the ground surface shall be brought up to normal subgrade with a suitable material approved by the Engineer. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for supplying all material required to bring the existing ground surface up to normal subgrade and shall be part of the bid price for Brick Sidewalk. In addition, if any area adjacent to the brick sidewalk, on the property line side of the sidewalk, shall be lower than the proposed sidewalk, the area between the property line and the sidewalk edge shall be filled in and compacted with an approved material and seeded.

5. Subgrade shall be compacted to a theoretical density of 95% at optimum

moisture and shall be graded off to a surface that will not vary more than 1/2" at any one point from normal subgrade. Wherever tree roots prevent excavation of existing ground surface to normal subgrade, subgrade will be determined by the engineer in the field.

6. Back Face of Sidewalk: Wherever curb or an adjoining property wall do not

exist on the property line of a new brick sidewalk or sidewalks that replace existing concrete or existing brick sidewalks, a retaining row of bricks shall be set for the purpose of preventing the new brick sidewalk from sloughing

02513-17 9/2015

off. This retaining row of bricks shall be formed by setting new sidewalk brick on end, side to side, in a row along the back edge of the sidewalk. The lower portions of the retaining row of bricks shall be embedded in 2" of a 1:3 cement mortar. The cost of the retaining row of bricks shall be included in the unit prices for brick sidewalk.

7. In the event the adjoining property is more than 10" above or below grade at

the property line, a concrete retaining wall in accordance with RW-2 or RW-3 shall be constructed for the purpose of retaining the back face edge of the proposed brick sidewalk.

8. Tree Boxes: Wherever trees exist within the brick sidewalk area or

wherever trees are to be placed in the brick sidewalk area, a tree box shall be formed with the bricks which are to be used in the brick sidewalk. The tree box shall be 5' by 5' (unless otherwise noted on the drawings) and shall be formed by embedding bricks on side, end to end, in 2" of a 1:3 cement mortar.

9. Cement-Sand Bedding: Upon completion of compaction and grading of the

subgrade, the subgrade shall be cleaned of all loose and foreign material. A uniform layer of a 1:3 cement-sand mixture, 4" thick, shall be placed upon the subgrade. This cement-sand bedding shall be screeded off and densified by tamping or rolling so that the top surface of the cement-sand bedding will be smooth with no more than 1/4" variation from a flat plane and shall be densified to 95% of theoretical density, at optimum moisture. Sand used for sand bedding shall be uniform in gradation and free from foreign material. Cement shall be Portland Cement and conform to ASTM C150. The cement-sand mixture may be mixed in place by the CONTRACTOR.

10. Laying Brick: Bricks will be stored in areas designated by the Engineer.

All bricks shall be carefully laid with the best face up in the pattern noted on the contract drawings or designated by the Engineer. Bricks shall be cut, not broken; using a high-speed masonry saw producing clean, sharp edges.

11. The bricks shall be laid with a uniform 1/8" joint between each brick and

joints shall be filled with a 1:3 cement-sand mixture. Sand used for filling joints shall be very fine in gradation and cement shall be Portland Cement which conforms to ASTM C150. Wooden mallets or the wooden end of a brick mason's hammer will be used to strike each brick to insure a proper set during placement of the bricks and after sweeping the cement-sand mixture into the joints.

12. Wetting Sequence: Once the cement-sand bedding is in place and the bricks

have been set upon the bedding, water shall be applied to the bricks in a sufficient amount to insure hydration of the cement-sand bedding material. After the brick sidewalk surface has completely dried from the initial

02513-18 9/2015

wetting for hydration of the bedding, the joints shall be filled with a dry cement-sand joint filler and wet a second time for hydration of the joint filler. Wooden mallets or the wooden end of a brick mason's hammer will be used to strike each brick to insure a proper set during placement of the bricks and after sweeping the cement-sand mixture into the joints. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for cleaning the brick surface of any cement-sand material.

G. Special Brick Sidewalk Condition: Whenever an existing brick sidewalk is to be

replaced with all new brick and existing brick sidewalk restoration is a part of the contract, the existing brick sidewalk to be replaced shall be removed by hand, by the CONTRACTOR, culled and cleaned and used for the brick sidewalk restoration. The unit price bid per square yard for brick sidewalk restoration shall include the cost of removing by hand, culling and cleaning of the existing bricks and moving to restoration area. If no brick sidewalk restoration is part of the contract, the OWNER will remove part or all of the existing brick in any area where existing brick sidewalk is to be replaced with all new brick sidewalk. All bricks which remain, after the OWNER has completed its brick sidewalk removal process or after bricks have been removed for brick sidewalk restoration as part of the contract, shall be considered unsuitable material above subgrade.

H. Restore Brick Sidewalk: Restoration and Spot Replacement

1. This item shall cover all work involved in spot replacement of missing brick and the restoration to proper grade of existing brick sidewalk where noted on the contract drawings.

2. Bricks in existing sidewalks where designated for restoration shall be

removed by hand and the subgrade shall be cut or filled, as required, until a proper subgrade is obtained. Sand which is uniform in gradation and free of foreign material shall be used as a fill material. The bricks removed and replacement brick shall then be placed back in the sidewalk in such a manner as to conform to the pattern of the sidewalk adjacent to the area restored. Bricks shall be cut, not broken; using a high-speed masonry saw producing clean, sharp edges. Once the existing bricks have been placed back in the sidewalk, joints shall be filled with a 1:3 cement-sand mixture. Sand used for filling joints shall be clean and very fine in gradation and cement shall be Portland cement which conforms to ASTM C150. Wooden mallets or the wooden end of a brick mason's hammer will be used to strike each brick to insure a proper set during placement of the bricks and after sweeping the cement-sand mixture into the joints. After the joints have been filled with the cement-sand mixture, the brick sidewalk surface shall be cleaned of all residue cement or sand by means of sweeping, washing, or cleaning with an acid solution.

3. Once the brick sidewalk surface has been cleaned to the satisfaction of the

Engineer, a light coat of clean fine graded sand shall be placed on the brick

02513-19 9/2015

sidewalk surface for the purpose of producing a non-skid surface and to insure complete filling of the joints. This light coat of sand will be removed by the CONTRACTOR at the end of the job.

4. Whenever there is a deficiency of existing brick in an area designated for

brick sidewalk restoration, the deficiency shall be corrected by obtaining bricks from areas designated for removal of existing brick sidewalk and replacement with new brick or concrete. The existing brick sidewalk shall be removed by hand, by the CONTRACTOR, culled and cleaned and used for the existing brick sidewalk restoration. If no brick sidewalk removal and replacement with new brick or concrete is part of the contract, the CONTRACTOR will obtain all bricks needed for restoration work from the OWNER storage yard and haul them to the site. If this is to occur it will be noted on the drawings or made a part of the additional requirements of the project.

I. Realigning/Setting Granite Curb

1. Realigning: Granite curb to be realigned shall be carefully removed from its

present bed. The curb trench shall be graded and compacted so as to provide the realigned curb minimum clearances of 4" under the curb and 6" in front of and behind the curb. The curb shall then be placed back in the trench and shimmed to correct line and grade with brick. After the curb has been realigned, the curb trench shall be backfilled with concrete to a minimum depth of 12". Special care shall be taken to insure that the concrete completely fills the space under the granite curb.

2. Setting: This item includes the replacement of existing curb in bad

condition, filling in where curb is missing or setting a new granite curb line. Where additional curb is specified, it will be furnished by the OWNER and hauled to the site by the CONTRACTOR. The curb trench shall be excavated, graded, and compacted so as to provide the new/replacement curb minimum clearances of 4" under the curb and 6" in front of and behind the curb. The curb shall be placed in the trench and shimmed to correct line and grade with brick. After the curb has been set, the curb trench shall be backfilled with concrete to a minimum depth of 12". Special care shall be taken to insure that concrete completely fills the space under the granite curb.

3. Joints: Joints between the sections of granite curb above the gutter line

wider than one-quarter (1/4) of an inch will not be accepted, and any rough ends of the sections will have to be chiseled by the CONTRACTOR at his expense to reduce the joint width to less than one-quarter (1/4) inch. The joints shall be filled with 1:3 cement sand mortar.

J. Concrete Curb & Gutter, Valley Gutter

02513-20 9/2015

1. For typical Monolithic Curb and Gutter section see Plan N-14000, Sheet

#16. For typical valley gutter section see Plan N-14000, Sheet #26. Use plan design specified.

2. Three (3") inch to four (4") inch holes shall be left in the curb opposite each

downspout to each house. Valley gutter shall not require holes.

3. Concrete curb or curb and gutter will not be considered complete for payment until properly backfilled and compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Backfilling and compaction shall be done as soon as practicable after forms are stripped.

K. Wheel Chair Ramps: This item shall include all work involved in the construction

of ADA approved wheel chair ramps. All existing curb and sidewalk shall be removed without injury to curb and sidewalk designated to remain and shall be satisfactorily disposed of by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall then perform all required excavation or furnish and place an approved fill material so as to obtain a proper subgrade. The subgrade shall then be compacted to a theoretical density of 95% at optimum moisture for a depth of 6 inches. A 6 inch thick wheel chair ramp shall then be constructed per Standard CG-12 (latest revision). All asphalt pavement reconstruction required in connection with construction of wheel chair ramps shall be performed as part of the bid unit price for wheel chair ramps.

1. Exposed Aggregate Finish shall be performed by wirebrushing, blasting, or

surface retarder unless another method is approved by the Engineer. 2. Concrete for the exposed aggregate finish shall conform to the requirements

of Section 203 of the specifications for the class specified, except that gravel shall be uncrushed, and tan or brown in color.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a sample of the exposed aggregate finish

for approval by the Engineer prior to beginning work. The sample shall be at least 12 inches by 12 inches and approximately 2 inches in depth. The approved sample shall be kept at the work site for comparison to completed work.

L. Cement Concrete Sidewalk: The concrete shall be screeded to a true surface, free

from depression and other irregularities and shall be floated with a magnesium alloy float. After it has taken its original set, it shall be floated again with a magnesium alloy float to produce a hard smooth finish free from water. The surface shall be given a light broom finish acceptable to the Engineer.

1. Should the sidewalk be too wide to properly finish from each side, it shall be

bridged so that the concrete will not be disturbed after it is screeded.

02513-21 9/2015

2. Wherever full width sidewalk is placed from the curb to the property line, the sidewalk shall be placed in alternate blocks. The size of these blocks shall be determined by the Engineer. Every effort shall be made to maintain color and texture.

3. Where there are soil pipes draining into the streets at a lower elevation than

the proposed gutter grade, the CONTRACTOR will relay these pipes under the sidewalk before paving, provided the property owner furnishes the necessary soil pipe. This item may be deleted in whole or in part and shall only be done if included as a bid item.

4. Entrance walks connecting with the city sidewalk that have to be cut off

shall be cut with a concrete saw and all exposed ends faced up with mortar cement, leaving a neat appearing surface. The cost of this work is to be included in the price bid per square yard for concrete work.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS PAVEMENT

A. Restore Durax Block Pavement

1. Description: Work shall consist of restoring damaged areas of pavement with Durax Granite Paving Block, laid on a cement-sand base, with the joints filled with asphalt and the entire surface covered with a pea gravel or stone chip covering.

2. Durax Block: Durax Block shall be furnished by the OWNER. It shall be

picked up from the OWNER storage area and hauled to the site by the CONTRACTOR; the cost of this work shall be included in the unit price bid for the restoration work.

3. Cement-Sand Bedding: The cement-sand bedding shall consist of one (1)

part of Portland cement and three (3) parts of sand mixed dry in a mechanical batch concrete mixer for one (1) minute.

a. The sand used shall conform to VDOT Specifications, sec. 202, for

Grading C. b. The cement-sand bedding shall be not less than one-half inch or more

than one and one-quarter inches in thickness after blocks have been laid and rolled.

4. Laying Durax Block: The Durax block shall be laid on the cement-sand

bedding in concentric, interlocking segments of about three (3) foot radius, with broken joints, or to meet existing. The upper or wearing surface of each block shall be flush with the general surface of the pavement, and four (4) inches above the concrete base, if used, when the pavement is completed.

02513-22 9/2015

No joints between the blocks shall be more than one-half nor less than one-quarter of an inch wide at the surface.

5. The joints shall then be filled by broadcasting with shovels and brooming in

with a hand broom, gravel which shall be clean and conform to VDOT Specifications, sec. 203, for VA. size No. 78.

6. Ramming, Sprinkling, and Rolling: The pavement shall then be rammed

with a double rammer weighing not less than 125 pounds striking a steel plate .75"x10"x18".

7. The pavement shall then be sprinkled and then rolled with a tandem roller weighing not less than five tons. The rolling shall begin at the gutter and proceed toward the center of the street overlapping on successive trips by one-half the width of the roller. The pavement shall then be rolled diagonally in two directions (at 90). If the rolling is omitted, with the approval of the Engineer, the pavement shall be re-tamped with a double rammer and steel plate after sprinkling.

8. At this time the pavement shall be checked with a ten (10) foot straight edge laid parallel with the center of the street and all irregularities greater than one-quarter inch shall be corrected.

9. Asphalt Joint Filler: The gravel filler in the joints shall have thoroughly

dried before any asphalt joint filler is poured. The length of time necessary for this drying depends upon the weather conditions, and will be determined by the Engineer.

a. The filling of the joints shall follow as closely behind the paving

operations as the drying of the gravel in the joints will permit. The laying of the Durax block will be stopped if the filling of the joints is not kept up with the paving operations, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

b. Approved kettles or tanks of not less than 200 gallons capacity shall

be used for the heating of the filler. Joints shall be filled by pouring the asphalt joint filler on the pavement and squeegeeing it into the joints until they are full or by any other method approved by the Engineer. The temperature at which the joint filler is to be used shall be approved by the Engineer.

c. The asphalt cement joint filler shall conform to VDOT Specifications,

sec. 210, for asphalt cement penetration grade 60-70.

10. Cover Material: The pavement shall be immediately covered with clean stone chips or pea gravel heated above 250F and meeting VDOT Specifications, sec. 205, for VA. size No. 78.

02513-23 9/2015

11. Obligation of CONTRACTOR at End of Warranty Period: In addition to

the proper maintenance of the pavement during the period of warranty, which shall include sanding if the surface becomes sticky in hot weather, the CONTRACTOR shall at his expense, just before the expiration of the warranty period, make such repairs as are necessary to the pavement where it shows indication of having been defectively constructed.

B. Restore Granite Spall Pavement

1. Description: This pavement is a roughly cut granite block wearing surface

as hereinafter described and locally known as "Spall". These Spall are to be laid in a cement sand bed with sand and gravel filler or asphalt joint filler and chip covering. The base is specified and paid for separately. Unless otherwise specified the OWNER will furnish the Spall.

2. Granite Spall: Granite Spall shall be from four (4) to seven and one-half (7

1/2) inches deep, from three (3) to six (6) inches wide and from three (3) to ten (10) inches long. The sides shall permit laying with joints not over three-quarters (3/4) of an inch in width and joints of that width shall be exceptional. The upper face shall be uniform to permit laying to the general surface of the pavement.

3. Cement Sand Bedding: The Cement Sand Bedding shall consist of one (1)

part of Portland cement and four (4) parts of sand mixed dry in a mechanical batch concrete mixer for one (1) minute.

a. The sand used shall conform to VDOT Specifications, sec. 202,

grading C. b. The Cement Sand Bedding shall not be less than two (2) inches thick;

however, no more of this Bedding shall be placed than will permit the placing, tamping, and rolling of the Spall before the initial set of the Cement Sand Bedding.

4. Laying Spall: On this Cement Sand Bedding the Granite Spall shall be laid

at right angles to the center of the street. Each course of Spall shall be approximately of uniform width and depth, and so laid that all longitudinal joints shall be broken by a lap of at least two (2) inches. As each course is laid the Cement Sand Bedding will fill the joints to within three (3) inches of the surface of the pavement. Irregular shaped and odd sized Spall shall be culled by the pavers.

a. After the Spall have been laid, the joints shall then be filled by

broadcasting with shovels from wheelbarrows and brooming in with

02513-24 9/2015

rattan or wire brooms ramming gravel, which shall be clean, and meet the specifications given in Sec. 203 for gradation 57.

5. Ramming, Sprinkling and Rolling: After the joints of the pavement have

been filled with ramming gravel, the pavement shall then be thoroughly rammed with double rammers weighing not less than on hundred and twenty-five (125) pounds, to a firm unyielding bed with uniform surface and to the proper grade and crown. a. Immediately after the ramming, the paving shall be sprinkled with a

hose. b. The pavement then shall be thoroughly rolled with a power driven

tandem roller weighing not less than five (5) tons, first longitudinally, beginning at the outer edge of the pavement and proceeding towards the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half (1/2) the width of the roller.

c. The paving shall then be rolled again diagonally in two (2) directions,

the second diagonal rolling crossing the line of the first until all of the Spall have been properly embedded in the Cement Sand Bedding.

d. The rolling shall be omitted at intersections and on grades steeper

than five (5) percent if directed to do so by the OWNER, in such cases when rolling is omitted the pavement shall be thoroughly rammed again after it has been sprinkled.

e. At this time the pavement shall be tested with a ten (10) foot straight

edge laid parallel with the center line of the pavement and any irregularities exceeding one-quarter (1/4) of an inch must be corrected as directed by the OWNER either by additional ramming, rolling or the re-laying of the Spall.

6. Sand Joint Filler: When Sand Joint Filler is specified, the surface of the

pavement shall be covered with clean sand. River sand may be used if it meets the approval of the OWNER or sand conforming to the specifications given in VDOT Section 202, grading C may be used. This sand shall be thoroughly broomed into the joints with hand brooms and sufficient sand added to leave one-half thick covering cover the Spall when the street is opened to traffic.

7. Asphalt Joint Filler: When "Asphalt Joint Filler" is specified in the Proposal

the gravel filler in the joints shall have thoroughly dried before any filler is poured. The length of time necessary for this drying depends upon weather conditions, and will be determined by the OWNER.

02513-25 9/2015

a. The filling of the joints shall follow as closely behind the paving operations as the drying of the gravel in the joints will permit. The laying of the Spall will be stopped if the filling of the joints is not kept up with paving operations to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

b. Approved kettles or tanks of not less than 200 gallons capacity shall

be used for the heating of the filler. Joints shall be filled by pouring the Asphalt Joint Filler on the pavement and squeegeeing it into the joints until they are full, or by any other method approved by the Engineer.

c. The temperature at which the Joint Filler is to be used shall be

approved by the Engineer.

d. The Asphalt Cement Joint Filler shall conform to the VDOT Specifications given in Section 210 for asphalt materials, penetration grade 60-70.

8. Covering Material: Pea Gravel or Stone Chip Covering will only be used if

asphalt filler is specified. The pavement shall be immediately covered with Pea Gravel after the filler has been poured. The Pea Gravel or Stone Chip shall be heated to a temperature approved by the Engineer. It shall be clean and conform to the specifications given in VDOT Sec. 203, for VA. size No. 8P.

9. Obligation of CONTRACTOR at End of Guarantee Period: In addition to

the proper maintenance of the pavement during the period of guarantee, which will include refilling sand filled joints if they become open and sanding the surface if pavement with asphalt joint filler becomes sticky in the hot weather, the CONTRACTOR shall at his expense, just before the expiration of the guarantee period, make such repairs as necessary to the pavement where it shows indication of having been defectively constructed.

C. Solid Concrete Paving Units - Paving units shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, and shall include supply and placement of solid concrete paving units and joint filling sand, excavation, granular base course, sand bedding course, and edge restraints.

D. Porous Concrete Pavers: Porous/Permeable Interlocking Concrete Pavers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications, and shall include supply and placement of the paving units and joint/opening fill material, excavation, bedding layer, base course, subbase course, and edge restraints. The manufacturers and paver types are included below: Manufacturer: Newline Hardscapes, Eagle Bay, or Approved Equal

02513-26 9/2015

Paver Type: Alleway Cobble (Newline Hardscapes), Oberfields Washington 21 Permeable Paver (Eagle Bay), or Approved Equal

3.12 SITE MAINTENANCE

A. Throughout all phases of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the work site clean and free from rubbish, debris and dust. Dust nuisance shall be abated by cleaning, sweeping, sprinkling with water or calcium chloride at no additional cost to the OWNER. Care shall be taken to prevent spillage on haul routes. Any such spillage shall be removed immediately and the route cleaned. If the use of water results in mud tracking on adjacent streets, the project will be shut down until streets are cleaned by the CONTRACTOR at his expense and no extra time will be allowed for the time thus lost. Materials and equipment shall be removed from the site as soon as they are no longer needed. If the CONTRACTOR does not respond to the requests to clean the streets, they shall be cleaned by the OWNER and the cost shall be deducted from payments due the CONTRACTOR.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain all trenches in a manner acceptable to the

OWNER until the trenches are accepted and approved for the replacement of pavement. After paving or restoration is completed, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for a period of twelve months for any settlement of trenches or damages which may occur, requiring additional fill, additional pavement or other corrective measures.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly take such corrective action as may be

necessary to return the trenches to acceptable condition when notified by the OWNER.

D. If the restoration or repair of defects is not completed in a reasonable length of

time, and after due notice the CONTRACTOR fails to complete the work, the OWNER will do whatever is necessary to restore the roadway and right of way to its original condition and complete the Work. The OWNER will deduct the actual cost of such work plus a percentage of overhead and handling from the CONTRACTOR estimate or will bill the CONTRACTOR for the actual cost plus a percentage for overhead and handling of the Work, whichever is applicable.

END OF SECTION

02513-27 9/2015


Television Inspection 02651-1 5/2017

SECTION 02651

TELEVISION INSPECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. The Work detailed in this Section includes closed circuit television (CCTV)

inspection of underground sewer pipelines, laterals, and manholes to document condition, to assure pipes have been cleaned and to allow for determination of repair and rehabilitation needs.

2. Measurement and payment for CCTV Inspection is defined in Section 01150.

B. Related Work Specified in other Sections: The Work of the following Sections

specifically apply to the Work of this Section. Other Sections of the Specifications not referenced below shall also apply to the extent required for proper performance of Work 1. Section 02150 - Bypass Pumping 2. Section 02652 - Sewer Manhole Inspection 3. Section 02760 - Cleaning of Sewers

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The latest edition of the following reference specifications, codes and standards

are part of this specification. By extension, the referenced documents noted in each of the references listed below are also part of this specification. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Specification and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Specification shall prevail. 1. National Association of Sewer Service Companies (NASSCO), Pipeline

Assessment and Certification Program©. 2. City of Richmond Sanitary Sewer System Design Guidelines and Standard

Specifications and Details.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCTV Inspection: CCTV inspection is a video inspection of sewer pipelines to determine existing conditions of the pipe and service lateral connections. CCTV inspection includes the pan-and-tilt video inspection of manholes as viewed by the camera from the invert of the manhole. CCTV inspection of the laterals includes video inspection of service laterals using lateral launch cameras from mainline sewers to determine existing conditions of the laterals.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements:

1. Perform CCTV inspection using personnel trained and certified in the use of

NASSCO’s Pipeline Assessment and Certification Program© (PACP). CONTRACTOR shall submit PACP training certificates of all CCTV personnel. Survey records are to conform to the latest NASSCO PACP codification.

2. Conform to all guidelines set forth by VOSH Compliance Program and be

solely responsible for safety during performance of all Work.

3. Be responsible for any damage to public or private property resulting from the televising activities, and repair or otherwise make whole such damage at no cost to OWNER.

4. Provide all necessary equipment:

a. CCTV Equipment: Select and use CCTV equipment that will record

videos on digital media. Provide CCTV equipment that produce instant color photographs of problem areas to document unusual, questionable, or severe conditions found during the course of the work. Take photographs whenever the condition ranking exceeds a NASSCO PACP codification grade 3.

b. Use television monitor and other components of the video system capable of producing a minimum 500-line resolution colored video picture.

c. Pipe Inspection Camera: Select and use a pan-and-tilt, radial viewing, zoom capable pipe inspection camera specifically designed and constructed for sewer inspections that is able to transmit a continuous image to the television monitor as it travels through the sewer segment. Provide cameras that are designed and manufactured for the inspection of service laterals and side sewers that have a minimum diameter of 3”. Use lateral launch cameras for service lateral inspection. The cameras shall be able to pass through a 3-inch opening and inspect 3- to 8-inch diameter lateral pipes at least 70 feet from the mainline sewer. Use a camera that designed to operate in 100 percent


humidity conditions. Use a pipe inspection camera that is provided with the following: (1) Inspection Camera Pan-and-Tilt: Use a pipe inspection camera

that pans ± 275 degrees and rotates 360 degrees. (2) Inspection Camera Zoom: Use a pipe inspection camera that is

capable of zooming 12X. (3) Inspection Camera Footage Counter: Use a camera with an

accurate footage counter which displays on the monitor the distance of the camera from the centerline of the starting manhole. Use a camera that has a minimum of 1,000 feet of coaxial cable. (a) Accuracy: Do not use marking on cable, or the like, which

would require interpolation for depth of manhole. Use measurement meters that are accurate over the entire length of the sewer line section being inspected and have an error less than or equal to 2 feet per 100 feet. Prior to recording the location of defect, service connection, etc., take up slack in the cable of the television inspection camera to assure metering device is designating proper footage. Check accuracy of the measurement meters daily by use of a walking meter, roll-a-tape, or other suitable device.

(4) Inspection Camera Resolution: Use a pipe inspection camera that is a high-resolution color chip camera capable of producing a minimum 500-line resolution colored video picture. Provide picture quality and definition that is to the satisfaction of the OWNER.

(5) Inspection Camera Locating Device: All pipe inspection cameras shall be equipped with devices to locate the sewer main, lateral connections and other pipe features. Mark the location of these features aboveground with white paint as directed by the OWNER.

(6) Pipe Inspection Camera Transporters: Provide pipe inspection cameras with transporters that position the pipe inspection camera near the centerline of the pipeline. Use power transporters that are driven by tracks or wheels. Provide both track and wheel power transporters during Work. Manual winches, power winches, TV cable and powered rewinds, or other devices that do not obstruct the camera view or interfere with proper documentation of the sewer conditions may be used to move the camera through the sewer line. Provide operator remote capability to “steer” camera so as to navigate the piping in the center. Floating the camera is not acceptable unless approved by the OWNER. When floating, outrigger must keep device in center of piping even around bends.

(7) Pipe Inspection Camera Lighting: Provide a lighting system that allows the features and condition of the pipe to be clearly seen regardless of pipe size. Avoid excessive lighting in the pipes which may result in distortion of the defects and pipe conditions. Equip the camera utilized for CCTV with remote


control devices to adjust the light intensity. d. CCTV Inspection Acquisition Software: Select and use CCTV

inspection acquisition software capable of generating reports to submit to the OWNER on hard copy and on digital media. (1) Use CCTV inspection acquisition software that is NASSCO

Pipeline Assessment and Certification Program© certified and compatible with the code’s latest release.

(2) If required for viewing inspection reports on digital media, provide the OWNER with viewing programs that are Microsoft PC compatible.

(3) Acquisition software must be compatible with City GIS database. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division 1. B. Submit the equipment manufacturer's technical information summary and guidelines to

the OWNER for review.

C. Submit CCTV reports and videos in digital form on DVDs, thumb-drives or larger drives. The submittal media shall be determined by the size of the files being submitted and as determined by the OWNER.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS AND EXPERIENCE

A. Experience Requirements:

1. CONTRACTOR shall have a minimum of 3 years of experience of CCTV

inspection of similar sized infrastructure. 2. The Contractor shall maintain on site at all times a competent field supervisor in

charge of the inspection. The field supervisor shall be responsible for the safety of all site personnel and site conditions as well as ensuring that all work is conducted in conformance with the specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Notification: Notify the OWNER at least 24 hours in advance of any CCTV inspection

so that the OWNER may observe inspection operations.


3.2 CCTV INSPECTION OF PIPELINES

A. General: Perform CCTV inspection on one sewer lines section at a time (i.e.,

manhole to manhole). B. CCTV Inspection:

1. Prior to entering any pipeline, consult any provided videos to determine the

condition of the pipe to determine equipment and techniques applicable to the configuration and condition of the existing pipe. Prior to deploying any cleaning equipment or tools in the pipe, run the camera through the pipe to determine the appropriate cleaning equipment and effort required to clean the pipe without damaging the existing pipe. Failure to comply with these requirements may result in the CONTRACTOR being charged for damage to the system.

2. Perform CCTV inspection immediately after pipeline cleaning. Do not allow the inspection camera to follow so close to the nozzle such that the view of the pipe wall is blocked by the nozzle. Verify the pipeline is clean, verify or measure the pipe sizes, determine existing condition of the pipeline and locate live service connections.

C. Flow Control: Adequately control the flow in the pipeline being CCTV inspected. Do

not exceed the depth of wastewater flow shown below:

Pipe Diameter (Inches)

Depth of Flow (Percent of Pipe Diameter)

6 – 10 10

12 – 24 15

Over 24 20

If during CCTV inspection of a sewer section, the wastewater flow depth exceeds the maximum allowable, reduce the flow depth to an acceptable level by performing the survey CCTV inspection during minimum flow hours, by diversion pumping or by pulling a camera with swab, high velocity jet nozzle or other acceptable dewatering device. Divert the flow in accordance with Section 02150 – Bypass Pumping.

D. Pipeline Inspection Camera: Move the pipe inspection camera through the pipeline in the downstream direction at a uniform rate, stopping when necessary to ensure proper documentation of the sewer's condition and service connections, but do not pull the pipe inspection camera at a speed greater than 30 feet per minute or 9 meters per minute. Position camera for inspection at the center point of the diameter or as nearest the center of non-circular piping.


E. Pipeline Conditions: Inspect pipelines by use of the pan-and-tilt feature of the pipe inspection to determine the condition of the pipeline. Document the conditions, defects and observations of pipelines using NASSCO’s Pipeline Assessment and Certification Program© codes.

F. Locating Point Repairs Necessary to Complete Inspection: If point repair is needed

in order for the continuous inspection to be completed from manhole to manhole due to impassibility or sewer collapse, make a special note in the documentation and inspection report.

G. Inspection of Service Connections during Mainline Inspection: Inspect service

connections by use of the pan-and-tilt feature of the pipe inspection camera. Include the connection to the sewer main and inspection up the service pipe, recording all defects found in the service connection as the focus of the inspection. Observe flows from service connections to ascertain if the flow is sanitary or extraneous flow. Record the results of the flow observation.

H. Inspection of Laterals and Side Sewers: Inspect lateral and side sewer connections

with a lateral launch camera that can be conveyed through the lateral from the mainline. The limit of inspection shall be from the mainline sewer to the property line. This item shall be separately paid under applicable bid items.

I. Observation of Infiltration: Quantify visible leakage of extraneous flow into the

sewer and record on electronic log and audio.

J. Communication: Whenever non-remote powered and controlled winches are used to pull the television camera through the line, set up telephones, radios, or other suitable means of communication between the operators positioned at the two manholes of the sewer line being inspected to ensure that good communications exist between members of the crew.

K. Visual Recording of CCTV Inspection: Make CCTV inspections continuous for

pipe segments between manholes. Do not leave gaps in the visual recording of a sewer segment and do not show more than a single sewer segment on each recorded file, unless specifically allowed by the OWNER.

L. Passage of Inspection Camera: If during CCTV inspection of a pipeline the camera

is unable to pass an obstruction, inspect the pipeline from the other direction (reverse setup) in order to obtain a complete inspection of the pipeline. Whenever such a condition arises, notify the OWNER to determine if an obstruction removal or point repair is necessary. When the CONTRACTOR encounters a protruding tap that prevents the passage of the camera, grind the protruding tap as specified in Section 02760 – Cleaning of Sewers unless otherwise directed by the OWNER. After the protruding tap is removed, complete the CCTV inspection of the pipeline.

M. When the camera is moving from the other direction in order to survey on either

side of an obstruction and a second repair location is encountered away from the


first obstruction, notify the OWNER and request a review of the CCTV video. N. CCTV Inspection Quality: CCTV inspections that have camera distortions,

inadequate lighting, dirty lens, excessive lighting or blurred/hazy picture of the associated line segment will be rejected. Re-televise any CCTV inspection deemed unacceptable by the OWNER at no additional cost to the OWNER. Payment for televised inspection will not be made until OWNER approves the quality of the inspection reports.

3.3 DOCUMENTATION AND INSPECTION REPORT

A. Inspection Report: For each CCTV inspection, provide a completely printed inspection

report generated by the CCTV inspection acquisition software that clearly identifies the location of defects and observations indexed in relation to adjacent manholes. Record defects and observations that shall be recorded include structural deficiencies, the locations and estimations of extraneous flows of service connections, joints, infiltration, unusual conditions, material transitions, roots, storm sewer connections and cracked or collapsed sections, the presence of scale and corrosion, signs of previous leakage, sewer line sections that the camera failed to pass through and reasons for the failure and other discernible features and data of significance. Document defects and observations in inspection reports, and supply a copy of such records to the OWNER.

1. Digital Media: Provide the inspection report to the OWNER on digital media

that is Microsoft PC compatible. Provide computer files in standard format. Contact the OWNER for format requirements.

2. Defect and Observation Codes: Document defects and observations utilizing the

latest release of NASSCO’s Pipeline Assessment and Certification Program© codes. Provide a table listing acronyms and their meaning with the logs.

3. JPEG Images: Each inspection report shall provide JPEG images of defects

greater than NASSCO PACP codification grade 3 and observations, including looking up all service laterals, surveyed during CCTV inspections in the inspection report. Link JPEG images to inspection report for viewing and printing when reviewing inspection reports on digital media.

4. MPEG Video: Provide a link to the MPEG video for each defect and

observation surveyed during the pipeline inspection. Videos must play via standard MPEG-ready software, requiring no proprietary software.

5. Pipeline Condition Rating: Provide a pipeline condition rating in each

inspection report. Use NASSCO’s Pipeline Assessment and Certification Program©, Condition Grading System to determine the pipeline condition rating.

6. Inspection Report Format: Provide each inspection report with the

following:


a. CCTV Inspection Form: Provide each inspection report with a CCTV

Inspection Form. Use a CCTV Inspection Form that is of a layout and format in accordance with NASSCO’s Pipeline Assessment and Certification Program©, CCTV Inspection Form. Other layouts and formats equivalent to NASSCO may be submitted, upon approval by the OWNER.

b. CCTV Inspection Graphic Form: Provide each inspection report with a CCTV Inspection Graphic Form. Include the following in the CCTV Inspection Graphic Form: (1) A pipeline illustration showing the pipe and the upstream and

downstream manholes. Show the location of the each defect and observation in the pipeline illustration.

(2) A record of each defect and observation from the starting manhole during the inspection. Include the distance from the starting manhole, NASSCO’s Pipeline Assessment and Certification Program© codes, and identify the JPEG image for each defect and observation.

(3) Direction of flow and direction of camera movement. c. CCTV Inspection Image Form: Provide each inspection report with a

CCTV Inspection Image Form. Show a record of each defect and observation during the inspection with JPEG images displayed with each defect and observation.

d. Pipeline Condition Rating Form: Provide each inspection report with a Pipeline Condition Rating Form. Include the following in the Pipeline Condition Rating Form: (1) List the number of structural defects and the number of operation

and maintenance defects per condition grade, (Condition Grades 1 through 5).

(2) List the Structural Pipe Rating, Operations and Maintenance Pipe Rating, Overall Pipe Rating and Pipe Rating Index.

B. Digital Video/Audio Recording:

1. Include both audio and video information that accurately reproduces the

original picture and sound of the CCTV inspection. Provide the video portion of the digital recording that is free of electrical interference and produces a clear and stable image. Provide the audio portion that is sufficiently free of background and electrical noise as to produce an oral report that is clear and discernible.

2. Include in the digital recording a visual and audio narrative noting:

a. Date, time of day, and depth of flow; b. Sewer segment number as provided by OWNER; c. Upstream manhole number; d. Downstream manhole number;


e. Type of sewer (e.g. sanitary, storm, combined); f. Size of sewer; g. Sewer materials of construction; h. Closest street address and street name on which sewer is located;

Direction of movement of camera, heading, and direction of flow; Reason for inspection.

3. Create separate MPEG video files for each pipe segment inspected. If a

reverse setup is required, store the individual portions of that pipe segment in separate MPEG video files.

4. Provide DVDs (or other digital media as directed by the Owner) for each

pipe segment inspected. Provide DVDs that are readable. Unreadable DVDs will be returned and new ones provided at no cost to the OWNER.

5. Continuously display the manhole reach (i.e., manhole to manhole), date,

time and length (in feet and tenth of feet) from starting manhole on the MPEG video. Place information on screen where it is clearly visible but does not interfere with video image.

6. Perform the pipeline inspection that consists of identifying a location both

within the pipe segment (physical location) and within the digital recording (video frame location) for each defect or observation. Do not use time codes for defect location. This will allow the digital recording and inspection data to be cross-referenced for instant access to any point of interest within the digital recording.

7. DVD Label: Place one label on the non-recordable side of the DVD.

Permanently label each DVD with the following: a. Assignment Number b. CONTRACTOR’S Name c. Inspection Type: Survey, Pre-Installation, Post-Installation d. Date Televised & Date Submitted e. Basin Number f. Street Name g. Pipe Diameter h. Pipe Length i. Line Section or Reach number

8. DVD Case Label: Provide two labels. Place one label on the spine of the case and the other on the face of the case. Permanently label each DVD case with the following information: a. Spine of DVD case:

(1) Assignment Number (2) Reach Number(s)


b. Face of DVD case: (1) Assignment File Number (2) CONTRACTOR’S Name (3) Inspection Type: Survey, Pre-Installation, Post-Installation (4) Date Televised & Date Submitted (5) Basin Number (6) Street Name (7) Pipe Diameter (8) Pipe Length (9) Line Section or Reach number

3.4 CCTV INSPECTION OF MANHOLES DURING PIPELINE CCTV

A. Manhole Inspection: Record panning the beginning and ending manholes of a sewer

segment to demonstrate that all debris has been removed and to view the condition of the invert, bench, and sidewalls of the manholes. This information is a supplement to the requirements in Section 02652- Sewer Manhole Inspection.

B. Raising Buried Manholes: If, in the progress of the Work, it is found that some manhole

covers are buried beneath the pavement, notify the OWNER. If the OWNER determines that access through the manholes is vital to the Work, expose the cover and reset the frame so that the cover is flush with the pavement. Raising or replacing of frames and covers will be paid separately under applicable bid items.

END OF SECTION

Sewer Manhole Inspection 02652-1 05/2017

SECTION 02652

SEWER MANHOLE INSPECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Above-ground inspection, evaluation, and condition assessment of sewer manholes.

B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections Include, But is Not Limited to, the

Following:

1. Section 02150 - Bypass Pumping 2. Section 02651 - Television Inspection 3. Section 02760 - Cleaning of Sewers

1.2 REFERENCE

A. Codes and standards referred to in this Section are:

1. National Association of Sewer Service Companies (NASSCO) Manhole Assessment and Certification Program©.

2. NASSCO Manual of Practice, Latest Edition. 3. Virginia Occupational Safety and Health (VOSH) Compliance Program.

4. ASCE Manhole Inspection & Rehabilitation Manual of Practice No. 92,

1997. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Manhole Inspection: It is the intent of this specification to provide above-ground manhole inspections, CONTRACTOR may enter manhole if necessary to field verify any conditions or finding(s), if deemed necessary. Manhole inspection includes data collection using a telescoping video camera, still photos of critical defects, condition assessment evaluation and report. Above-ground inspections must also provide for inspection of connecting sewer main pipes for critical defects.


1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. Sewer manhole inspection shall be performed by personnel trained and certified in the use of NASSCO’s Manhole Assessment and Certification Program© (MACP). Contractor shall submit PACP/MACP training certificates of all personnel doing the work to the OWNER

2. Contract work requires work in active sewer manholes. Follow all federal,

state, and local requirements for safety in confined spaces. Conform to all guidelines set forth by VOSH Compliance Program. CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for safety during the performance of all work.

3. Provide all necessary equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit sample inspection forms, photographs, and video from three recent

manhole inspection projects of a similar nature.

C. Submit inspection forms and DVD-ROMs to the OWNER for review. Contractor shall provide videos, photos and inspection reports on external hard drive(s) if requested by the OWNER.

1. Provide DVD-ROMs and hard drive(s) of a quality sufficient for the

OWNER to evaluate the condition of the manhole and locate the service connections. If quality is not sufficient, CONTRACTOR shall re-inspect the manhole and provide inspection reports and DVD-ROMS at no additional cost to the OWNER. Camera distortions, inadequate lighting, dirty lens, or blurred/hazy picture will be cause for rejection of DVD-ROMs and rejection of the associated manhole inspection.

a. CONTRACTOR to submit the initial inspection report and DVD-

ROM to the OWNER for review of video quality before all inspections are completed. OWNER acceptance of initial report and video does not prevent future rejection of any of the remaining inspections.

2. DVD-ROMs and hard drive(s) submitted become the property of the

OWNER.

D. Maintain a master copy of all inspection reports, and DVD-ROMS submitted until final acceptance of the contract and through warranty period.



A. Perform work in accordance with the best practice of the industry. B. Experience Requirements:

1. A minimum of 3 years of experience in manhole inspection using telescoping camera equipment is required. Furnish documentation of experience to OWNER upon request.

C. Maintain on site at all times a competent field supervisor in charge of the

inspection. The field supervisor shall be approved in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement of work. Any change in supervision must also be approved in writing by the ENGINEER prior to the change.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Manholes Containing Mechanical or Electrical Equipment:

1. Drawings may not show locations of flow monitoring equipment. If a manhole contains any mechanical hardware or electrical flow monitoring equipment, do not proceed with the scheduled work and notify the OWNER.

2. Reschedule work in such manholes until equipment has been removed by

the OWNER and further instructions are given.

3. Do not bypass manholes with mechanical hardware or electrical equipment unless approved by the OWNER.

4. Damage to installed equipment due to CONTRACTOR’s failure to adhere to

the above will be repaired by the OWNER at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.

B. Field Location of Manholes, Cleanouts and End of Lines:

1. Be responsible for locating all manholes, cleanouts and end of lines. If CONTRACTOR is unable to locate manhole, cleanout or end of line, notify OWNER in writing. Raise manhole frames as directed by the OWNER.

2. Confirm the manhole number and location before starting work.

1.8 SALVAGE

A. Manhole covers and frames from abandoned manholes remain the property of the OWNER. Deliver salvaged items to locations designated by OWNER.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Camera

1. Camera

a. Camera shall have both video and photograph capabilities. b. Camera shall be digital and capable of producing photographs with a

minimum resolution of 5.0 megapixels and shall be equipped with a flash.

c. Camera shall be capable of zooming 12X for digital viewing. d. Camera shall be able to be connected to a telescoping lowering mast

for 360 degree above-ground manhole inspection.

e. Camera shall be capable of being operated remotely from an inspection unit.

f. Adequate camera lighting shall be provided.

g. Video inspection data acquisition software: Select and use inspection

acquisition software capable of generating printed reports to submit to the OWNER on hard copy and on digital media.

(1) Use inspection acquisition software that is NASSCO Manhole

Assessment and Certification Program© certified. (2) Acquisition software must be compatible with City GIS

database.

B. When using survey rods or tape measures for linear measurements, the measurements shall be accurate to one inch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Notification: Notify the OWNER at least 24 hours in advance of any manhole inspection so that the OWNER may observe the inspection operations if so desired.

3.2 TRAFFIC CONTROL

A. Provide barricades, flaggers, and other traffic control devices as necessary in work areas and around open manholes. Maintain traffic at all times with minimal disruption to residents and businesses.


3.3 FLOW CONTROL:

A. Adequately control flow in the manhole being inspected. The depth of flow in the manhole should not exceed the height of the bench. If during inspection, the wastewater flow depth exceeds the allowable amount, reduce the flow depth to an acceptable level by performing the inspection during minimum flow hours, by diversion pumping, or by some other dewatering device. Divert flow in accordance with Section 02150 – Bypass Pumping. Should a surcharge condition be discovered, notify the OWNER immediately.

3.4 MANHOLE CLEANING

A. Sewer manhole shall be cleaned only if necessary to provide unobstructed views of bench, channel, connecting sewers, and any other manhole component. Disposal of material removed during cleaning shall conform to the disposal requirements specified in Section 02760 – Cleaning of Sewers

3.5 SEWER MANHOLE INSPECTION

A. Inspection of Manhole Structure: Inspect and document the location, type of material, conditions, defects, and observations of manholes using the Manhole Inspection Form, located in EXHIBIT C of this CONTRACT or an equivalent MACP compliant MH Inspection form approved by the OWNER.

B. Manhole Condition Ratings: Each Manhole Inspection Form shall provide

condition ratings for each sewer manhole component (cover, frame, chimney, cone, wall, bench, channel etc). Use the condition rating system next to each manhole component on the Manhole Inspection Form, located in Exhibit C of this CONTRACT or an equivalent MACP condition rating system to assign and record condition ratings.

C. Infiltration and Inflow (I/I): Each Manhole Inspection Form shall provide I/I

ratings for each sewer manhole component. Use the rating system on Page 2 under Evidence of Leakage section of the Manhole Inspection Form, located in Exhibit C of this Contract or an equivalent MACP rating system to assign and record I/I ratings.

D. Roots: Each Manhole Inspection Form shall provide information on type of roots

for each sewer manhole component. Use the rating system on Page 2 under Evidence of Roots section of the Manhole Inspection Form, located in Exhibit C of this Contract, to assign and record type of roots.

E. Inspection of Service Connections: Service connections shall be inspected by use

of the inspection camera. Focus of inspection shall include the connection of the sewer main and lamping inspection up sewer pipe, recording all defects found in the service connection. Flows from the service connections shall be observed for approximately two minutes to ascertain if the flow is sanitary or extraneous flow.


The video recording may be paused during observation. Results of the pipe investigation and flow observation shall be recorded on Page 2 of the Manhole Inspection Form located in EXHIBIT C of this CONTRACT. Each service connection shall be photographed using the zooming capability of the digital camera for approximately 40 linear feet of sewer pipe. Take enough photographs to cover the entire circumference of the pipe.

F. Raising Buried Manholes: If, in the progress of the Work, it is found that some

manhole covers are buried beneath the pavement, notify the OWNER. If the OWNER determines that access through the manholes is vital to the Work, expose the cover and reset the frame so that the cover is flush with the pavement. Restore the pavement surrounding the manhole to match the existing pavement. Raising of frames and covers will be paid separately under the applicable bid items.

3.6 DOCUMENTATION AND INSPECTION REPORT

A. For each sewer manhole inspection, provide: 1. The completed Manhole Inspection Form, Page 1 and Page 2, located in

EXHIBIT C of this CONTRACT or a completed equivalent form that was previously approved by the OWNER. Provide a hard copy and a Microsoft PC digital copy.

2. A Video Inspection Report generated by the video inspection acquisition

software that clearly identifies the location of defects and observations indexed on the Manhole Inspection Form, located in EXHIBIT C of this CONTRACT. Contact the OWNER for format requirements

3. MPEG Video: Each Video Inspection Report shall provide a link to the

MPEG video for each defect and observation surveyed during the inspection. Videos must play via standard MPEG-ready software, requiring no proprietary software.

a. The digital recording shall be free of electrical interference and shall

produce a clear and stable image.

b. The digital recording shall include a visual noting:

(1) Date and time of day;

(2) Manhole number. Manhole numbers shall be designated by OWNER.

c. DVD-ROMs must be readable. Unreadable DVD-ROMs will be

returned and new ones provided at no cost to the OWNER. Compile sewer manhole inspections onto an external hard drive(s) at end of project and provide to the OWNER if requested by the OWNER.


d. DVD-ROM Label: One label shall be placed on the non-recordable

side of the DVD-ROM. Permanently label each DVD-ROM with the following:

(1) Assignment Number (2) Contractor’s Name (3) Inspection Type: Survey, Pre-Installation, Post-Installation (4) Inspection Date(s) (5) Submittal Date (6) Basin Number (7) Street Name (8) Inspected Manhole Numbers

4. DVD-ROM Case Label: Two labels are required. One label shall be

placed on the spine of the case and the other on the face of the case. Permanently label each DVD-ROM case with the following information:

a. Spine of DVD-ROM case:

(1) Assignment Number (2) Basin Number

b. Face of DVD-ROM case:

(1) Assignment Number (2) Contractor’s Name (3) Inspection Type: Survey, Pre-Installation, Post-

Installation (4) Inspection Date(s) (5) Submittal Date (6) Basin Number (7) Street Name (8) Inspected Manhole Numbers

5. JPEG Images: Each inspection report shall provide JPEG images of defects

and observations surveyed during video inspections. JPEG images shall be linked to Video Inspection Report for viewing and printing. JPEG images shall be referenced on the Manhole Inspection Form located in EXHIBIT C of this CONTRACT.

END OF SECTION

Sewer Inspection/Cleaning 02653-1 02/2009

SECTION 02653

SEWER SMOKE TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements for providing sewer smoke testing services to determine sources of inflow in the sewer. Results are used to determine where further inspection, such as dyed-water testing, manhole inspection, and CCTV inspection, may be required and to assist in determining and prioritizing rehabilitation needs.

B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections Include, But is Not Limited to, the Following:

1. Section 02150 - Bypass Pumping 2. Section 02651 - Television Inspection 3. Section 02652 - Manhole Inspection 4. Section 02654 - Sewer Dyed-Water Testing

1.2 REFERENCE


1. National Association of Sewer Service Companies (NASSCO) Manhole Assessment and Certification Program©.

2. NASSCO Inpsector’s Handbook, Latest Edition. 3. Virginia Occupational Safety and Health (VOSH) Compliance Program.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Smoke Testing: Smoke testing is the process of using low pressure smoke in sewer systems to locate sources of rain-fall and snow-melt dependent inflow into the sewer.

B. Sources of Inflow: Sources of inflow may include downspouts, sump pumps, clean-outs, yard drains, stairwell, driveway, and foundation drains, catch basins, and interconnections between storm and sanitary sewers. In some cases, broken piping and covered manhole lids or clean-out caps may be encountered.

C. Finding: A finding is a source of inflow that has been found during smoke testing.


1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Contract work requires work in active sewer manholes. Follow all federal, state, and local requirements for safety in confined spaces. Conform to all guidelines set forth by VOSH Compliance Program. The contractor is solely responsible for safety during the performance of all work

B. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for any damage to public or private property

resulting from sewer smoke testing activities and shall repair or otherwise make whole such damage at no cost to the OWNER.

C. Provide all necessary equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit sample inspection reports from three recent smoke testing projects of a

similar nature to the OWNER, prior to commencement of the work.

C. Submit the initial testing report with photographs to the OWNER for review of quality before all testing is completed. OWNER acceptance of initial report and photographs quality does not prevent future rejection of any of the remaining tests.

D. Maintain a master copy of all testing reports and photographs submitted until final acceptance of the contract and through warranty period.


A. Perform in accordance with the best practice of the industry. The specifications call attention to the features but not purport to cover all details entering into the required work.

B. Experience Requirements:

1. A minimum of 3 years of experience with smoke testing sewers is required. Furnish documentation of experience to OWNER upon request.

C. Maintain on site at all times a competent field supervisor in charge of the testing.

The field supervisor shall be approved in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement of work. Any change in supervision must also be approved in writing by the ENGINEER prior to the change.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SMOKE SOURCE

A. Smoke source may be smoke candles or liquid smoke capable of producing not less than 25,000 cubic feet of smoke in three minutes. Duration of recommended smoke candles is typically 3 to 5 minutes.

B. Smoke must be non-toxic, non-explosive, odorless, and non-staining.

C. Smoke may be added to a manhole after the test has begun if it is determined that

additional smoke is needed.

2.2 SMOKE BLOWER

A. Smoke blower shall have a capacity of at least 1700 cfm. B. Smoke blower should be fitted over manhole with a gasket device to maximize the

amount of smoke entering the sewer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION AND NOTIFICATION

A. Coordinate and schedule testing dates, times, and location with fire and police departments, OWNER and any other affected utilities or agencies within at least 2 weeks in advance of the testing. Notify and advise on a daily and street-to-street basis during the testing.

B. Notify all property owners who may be affected by the testing within one week of testing and all property owners who are connected to the test segment, at least 3 days prior to testing.

1. Notification can be achieved via mailings, phone calls, and door hangers.

Please see “Sample Notification Letter” in Exhibit X of this CONTRACT. 2. In the notification letter and reminders, advise property owner(s) to run

water into all household drain traps prior to the testing.

3. Notify property owners(s) that smoke may escape through sewer vents (i.e. roof vents), dry traps which have not had water placed in them, and defective house piping.

C. Where access to manholes in easements and rights-of-way is required, the

CONTRACTOR will obtain permission for access for his equipment.


D. Barricades and warning signs shall be used in work areas and around open

manholes. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and maintain traffic controls and safety devices as required.

E. If, in the progress of the work, it is found that some manhole covers are buried

beneath the pavement, the OWNER shall be notified. If the OWNER determines that access through the manholes is vital to the work, the cover shall be exposed and the frame shall be reset so that the cover is flush with the pavement. The pavement surrounding the manhole shall be restored to match the existing pavement. Such work will be reimbursed by the unit bid item for manhole frame and cover replacement.

3.2 TRAFFIC CONTROL


3.3 PROCEDURES

A. Smoke testing should not be performed when the ground is saturated, frozen, or snow-packed, or when the pipe is flowing full, or during rainy or windy days. Smoke testing should be performed at least one week after a precipitation event unless authorized differently by OWNER.

B. Test one sewer segment at one time, from manhole to manhole. Perform the test (i.e. locate smoke supply and blower) at the upstream manhole of the pipe segment being tested.

C. Flow Control: Control flow in sewers as needed to permit the work to be

accomplished, by use of plugs, sandbags, flow restrictor, pump bypasses, or other means. Divert flow in accordance with Section 21150 – Bypass Pumping.

D. Testing: Smoke shall be supplied at a pressure of not less than 1.0 psi.

E. Digital Photos: Document all potential inflow sources (i.e. smoking sites) with a

digital photograph. Photographs shall be provided in JPEG format.

F. Testing shall be ceased and pipe segment vented at the first indication of smoke inside any building or residence.

3.4 DOCUMENTATION AND TESTING REPORT

A. Testing report: For each affected property, document and record the following items on the Smoke Testing Form located in EXHIBIT D of this CONTRACT. An affected property is where one or more findings are identified.


1. Date and time of testing. 2. Name(s) of personnel/crew performing the testing.

3. Basin identification.

4. Street name and name of nearest intersection, for tested segment(s).

5. Identification of the manhole where testing is began, where the smoke the

bomb is placed. 6. Identification of tested pipe segment(s) in relation to connecting manholes.

7. Approximate length (feet) of sewer being tested.

8. Address of affected property.

9. Findings:

a. Location of findings (smoke leaks and illicit connections). In the case

of downspouts and sump pumps, CONTRACTOR is to provide name(s) of property owner(s) and exact address of residence or building.

b. Description of finding(s) c. Provide type of surface cover and approximate drainage area.

d. Estimated rate of smoke coming out of the source finding (low,

medium, high based on experience). e. Recommendation on how to remove or more accurately identify the

inflow source.

f. Mark location of finding (leaks and illicit connections) on GIS map of the collection system. GIS map of collection system to be provided by OWNER.

g. Number or label findings in format acceptable to OWNER.

10. Provide hard copy and digital copy of completed inspection form to

OWNER. Digital copy is to be Microsoft PC compatible.

11. Attach digital photographs (in JPEG format) of findings to the report. Provide hard and digital copies of photographs. The hard copy of the


photograph shall be a minimum of 4” by 6”. Label each photograph with the following items:

a. Date and time of testing. b. Location of finding – address or name of nearest intersection.

c. Identification of the manhole where testing is began, where the smoke

the bomb is placed.

B. If no properties are affected and no finding(s) are identified during the test, fill out one Smoke Test Form and fill in items 1-7 below: 1. Date and time of testing. 2. Name(s) of personnel/crew performing the testing.


4. Street name and name of nearest intersection, for tested segment(s).

5. Identification of the manhole where testing is began, where the smoke the

bomb is placed. 6. Identification of tested pipe segment(s) in relation to connecting manholes.

7. Approximate length (feet) of sewer being tested.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02654

SEWER DYED-WATER TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements for providing sewer dyed-water testing and flooded sewer dyed-water testing services to determine sources of infiltration and inflow into the sewer. Results are used to determine where further inspection, such as CCTV and/or manhole inspection, may be required and to assist in determining and prioritizing rehabilitation needs.

B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections Include, But is Not Limited to, the Following:

1. Section 02651 - Television Inspection 2. Section 02652 - Manhole Inspection

1.2 REFERENCE


1. Water Environment Federation (WEF) Manual of Practice FD-6, 1994. 2. Virginia Occupational Safety and Health (VOSH).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dyed-Water Testing: Dyed-water testing is used to verify inflow sources. It can also be used to detect infiltration sources from other crossing pipelines, stream sections, and ditch sections.

B. Sources of Infiltration and Inflow (I/I): Sources of inflow and infiltration may include defects in the pipe, pipe joints, manholes, and clean-outs, as well as illicit connections to the sewer system such as downspouts, sump pumps, yard drains, stairwell, driveway, and foundation drains, catch basins, interconnections between storm and sanitary sewer systems, and other unauthorized connections.

C. Finding: A finding is a source of I/I that has been found during dye testing.


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit sample test reports from three recent dyed-water testing projects of a

similar nature. C. Submit the initial testing report with photographs to the OWNER for review of

quality before all testing is completed. OWNER acceptance of initial testing report and photographs quality does not prevent future rejection of any of the remaining tests.

D. Maintain a master copy of all testing reports and photographs submitted until final acceptance of the contract and through warranty period.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. CONTRACT work requires work in active sewer manholes. Follow all federal, state, and local requirements for safety in confined spaces. Conform to all guidelines set forth by VOSH Compliance Program. The CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for safety during the performance of all work.

2. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for any damage to public or private

property resulting from sewer-dyed water testing activities and shall repair or otherwise make whole such damage at no cost to the OWNER.

3. Provide all necessary equipment.


A. Perform work in accordance with the best practice of the industry. The specifications call attention to the features but not purport to cover all details entering into the required work.

B. Experience Requirements:

1. A minimum of 3 years of experience with dyed-water testing in sewers is required. Furnish documentation of experience to OWNER upon request.

C. Maintain on site at all times a competent field supervisor in charge of the testing.

The field supervisor shall be approved in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement of work. Any change in supervision must also be approved in writing by the ENGINEER prior to the change.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Fluorescent Dye

1. Dye may be in tablet, liquid, or powder form. 2. Use dye that is safe to handle, biodegradable and inert to the soil and debris

in sewers. Use dye that is green in color.

3. Dye may be added after the test has begun if it is determined that additional dye is needed. The darker the water, the more dye will be needed to be added. Dye manufacturer’s guidelines must be followed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION AND NOTIFICATION

A. Coordinate and schedule testing dates, times, and location with fire and police departments, OWNER and any other affected utilities or agencies within at least 2 weeks in advance of the testing. Notify and advise on a daily and street-to-street basis during the testing.

B. Notify property owner(s) within one week of testing and at least 3 days prior to testing.

1. Notification can be achieved via mailings, phone calls, and door hangers.

C. Where access to manholes in easements and rights-of-way is required, the

CONTRACTOR will obtain permission for access for equipment. D. Barricades and warning signs shall be used in work areas and around open


E. If, in the progress of the work, it is found that some manhole covers are buried

beneath the pavement, the OWNER shall be notified. If the OWNER determines that access through the manholes is vital to the work, the cover shall be exposed and the frame shall be reset so that the cover is flush with the pavement. The pavement surrounding the manhole shall be restored to match the existing pavement. Such work will be reimbursed by the unit bid item for manhole frame and cover replacement.


3.2 TRAFFIC CONTROL


3.3 FLOW CONDITIONS

A. Perform sewer dyed- water tests under low flow conditions. The depth of flow in the manhole should not exceed the height of the bench.

3.4 PROCEDURES

A. If testing a direct connection, such as a downspout or a storm inlet, add dye to the suspected inflow/infiltration source connection. Add water as necessary.

B. If performing flooded dyed-water testing for storm sewers that are parallel or that

cross sanitary sewers and that have been determined to be leaking during smoke testing, plug and flood the storm sewers prior to adding dye. Flooded dyed-water testing can also be used in ditches and other low-lying areas adjacent to sanitary sewers that have been previously determined to be leaking with smoke testing.

C. Dye testing should not be performed under high flow conditions, when the ground is saturated, frozen, or snow-packed.

D. Digital Photos: Document all verified inflow sources with a digital photograph.

Photographs shall be provided in JPEG format.

E. CCTV of piping and/or manhole inspection may be necessary to verify findings from dyed-water testing.

3.5 DOCUMENTATION AND TESTING REPORT

A. Testing report: Document and record the following items on the Sewer Dyed-Water Testing Form located in EXHIBIT E of this CONTRACT.

1. Date and time of testing. 2. Name(s) of personnel/crew performing the testing.


4. Lot and Block Number.

5. Type of property.

6. Address of Dye Introduction Location.


7. Name and phone number of property owner. 8. Identification of the location where testing is began. 9. Identification of Location(s) of Positive Dye Transfer Finding(s).

a. Provide type of surface cover and approximate drainage area. b. Provide recommendation on how to remove or more accurately

identify the inflow source.

c. Mark location of finding on GIS map of the collection system. GIS map of collection system to be provided by OWNER.

d. Number or label findings in format acceptable to OWNER.

e. Provide estimates of flow rate for each finding (inflow source)

according to following table:

Type of Inflow Sources Estimated Inflow Rate (gpm) Downspout 10 Area Drain 20

Driveway Drain 15 Foundation Drain 5

Sump Pump 5 Catch Basin 100

Table adapted from the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Department of Environmental Protection.

10. Provide hard copy and digital copy of completed Dyed-Water Testing Form

to the OWNER. Digital copy is to be Microsoft PC compatible.

11. Attach digital photographs of findings to the report. Provide photographs in JPEG format. Provide hard and digital copies of photographs. The hard copy of the photograph shall be a minimum of 4” by 6”. Label each photograph with the following items:

a. Date and time of testing. b. Address of Dye Introduction Location. c. Positive Dye Transfer Observation Location.

END OF SECTION

Multi-Sensor Inspections 02732-1 5/2017

SECTION 02732

MULTI-SENSOR INSPECTIONS – CCTV, LASER, SONAR, H2S

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all materials labor, supervision, and equipment necessary to perform detailed pipeline inspections and data collection for subsequent condition assessment. Data collected shall include any combination as ordered:

1. Closed-circuit television (CCTV) or high-definition (HD) Images assessment of selected sanitary sewer pipes using the National Association of Sewer Service Companies (NASSCO) industry standard Pipeline Assessment and Certification Program (PACP) forms and coding,

2. 2D laser profiling of selected 8” to 30” diameter sewer pipes and subsequent data processing,

3. 3D Lidar/laser profiling of selected 36” diameter and larger sewer pipes and subsequent data processing,

4. Sonar profiling of selected sewer pipes and subsequent data processing,

5. Collection of H2S gas concentration data from selected sewer pipes and subsequent data processing.

B. The field investigations shall result in a visual and written record of internal pipeline general asset identification, system features, defects, wastewater depth, depth and volume of accumulated debris, and related information. All sensor data must be must be synchronized to the same location(s) such that data applicable to each location is reported in a manner where all data for each location is simultaneously viewable.

C. Related work specified elsewhere may include, but is not limited to:

1. Section 02150: Bypass Pumping

2. Section 02651: Television Inspection

3. Section 02652: Sewer Manhole Inspection


4. Section 02760: Cleaning of Sewers

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The latest edition of the following reference specifications, codes and standards are part of this specification. By extension, the referenced documents noted in each of the references listed below are also part of this specification. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Specification and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Specification shall prevail.

1. National Association of Sewer Service Companies (NASSCO), Pipeline Assessment and Certification Program©.

2. ASTM F1216 – Standard Practice for Rehabilitation of Existing Pipelines and Conduits by the Inversion and Curing of a Resin-Impregnated Tube

3. City of Richmond Sanitary Sewer System Design Guidelines and Standard Specifications and Details.

B. Additional ASTM, ANSI, NACE, AWWA standards and other reference standards or specifications directly or indirectly referenced in this Specification are applicable.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCTV Inspection: CCTV inspection employs a television camera and related equipment to inspect sewer pipelines to record existing conditions of the pipe, service lateral connections and other features. CCTV inspection includes the pan-and-tilt video inspection of manholes from the pipe invert.

B. Laser Profiling: Laser profiling is a technique used to determine the dimensions and surface profile of mainline sewer pipes using 3D laser scanners or 2D profiling lasers attached to the CCTV inspection equipment.

C. Sonar Profiling: Sonar profiling is a technique that uses sound waves to determine the dimensions and surface profile of mainline sewer pipes using a sonar unit attached to the CCTV inspection equipment or as a standalone unit.


A. Intent: The general intent regarding experience is for the City to employ field crews qualified to collect multi-sensor information in the field for subsequent processing by qualified technicians and engineers. The combination of mobilizing qualified field crew, deploying applicable equipment and software, and processing of data by experts will deliver successful results.

B. Project Delivery Team:


1. Team Member Experience: The project delivery team (proposed project manager, data processing staff, field engineer, superintendent, foremen) shall have demonstrated experience in providing adequate systems to schedule, manage, and control all activities (including subcontractor activities) on projects of similar size and nature. Experience that will be verified prior to award includes delivery of projects on schedule, ability to collect required information in field environments and timely and accurate processing of information into reports for condition assessment.

2. Field Superintendent Experience: The field superintendent assigned to the project shall have a minimum of two years concentrated multi-sensor field deployment experience in sewer pipe diameters ranging up to 60 inches or greater in dry, partial-flow and full-flow conditions.

3. Contractor Experience: The CONTRACTOR’S project delivery team must have a minimum of five years multi-sensor experience on projects of similar scope and nature to the project being bid, including at least 500,000 linear feet of CCTV video, 100,000 linear feet of sonar profiling and 100,000 linear feet of 3D lidar or 2D laser profiling in sewers measuring up to 96 inches in diameter or greater.

1.5 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01300 – Submittals and this Section. The following shall be submitted to the OWNER in writing prior to or at the time indicated below. Failure to do so will prevent progression of the Work to the next step. No change of equipment or procedures may be made during the course of the Work without the prior written approval of the OWNER.

B. Submit With Bid Documents: Refer to the Instructions to Bidders, Statement of Work, and this Section. These submittals shall be submitted with bid documents and shall include detailed Qualifications and Experience descriptions.

1. A description of the multi-sensor contractor/subcontractor firm’s experience, including an overview of the firm, location of the primary office(s) supporting field crews working in Richmond, number and type of field crews, field equipment and maintenance support, applicable certifications/licenses and QA/QC program.

2. A representative multi-sensor report from a recently completed project for one manhole to manhole pipe segment, including a PACP coded CCTV report, laser profile, sonar profile and H2S measurements.

C. Submit Prior to or at Contract Initiation Pre-Construction Meeting:


1. Supervisor/laborer PACP and basic safety training and certifications (e.g., VDOT MOT, CSE, OSHA 10-hour).

2. Proposed multi-sensor report forms and format.

D. Submit During Construction:

1. Updated plans and schedules.

2. Confirmation of inspection quantities to support no less than monthly billing.

3. Site-specific videos and logs as requested.

4. Fully processed data and related reports within 30 days of completion of field data collection.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT:

A. Equipment and Service Providers: It is the intent of these specifications to be non preferential and nonproprietary, with the goal of receiving data and reports that accurately communicate system condition.

B. General:

1. The multi-senor platforms must be capable of insertion through a minimum circular manhole opening of 23-inches without modifications to the access structure. The platforms (skids, tractor, float, etc.) shall be capable of travelling a distance of at least 1,500 feet in a single direction (upstream or downstream) from a single access point.

2. CONTRACTOR shall use footage metering devices to properly locate each inspection. Metering devices shall have a minimum accuracy of one percent of actual distance. Marking of cable/tether or similar means that require interpolation relative to manhole depth or other feature locations, will not be permitted. Distance data must be automatically logged along with sensor data.

C. CCTV System:

1. The purpose of CCTV System is to visualize pipeline features and defects for recognition and/or correlation with measured data. Imagery of the pipeline above the fluid level must be gathered for the complete inspection. In addition, the CCTV system must provide real-time feedback to the operator in order to improve the quality of multi-sensor data collected and reduce the risk of


becoming lodged or lost in a pipeline. CCTV data must be annotated via a digital database, viewable off-line, and importable into proper compliant pipe annotation software. The latter capability ensures that the information is easily viewed, shared, stored, and retrieved for comparative analyses, historical references, and prediction of future pipe condition. The data is intended to identify operational and maintenance issues, construction features and structural defects. CCTV inspection shall include production of CCTV videos and PACP compliant coding of the pipeline and the preparation of all video, digital, and written reports.

2. The CCTV camera must be capable of operator-controlled pan, tilt, and zoom (PTZ) operations during an inspection. The camera shall be waterproof, corrosion resistant, and have a minimum depth rating of 100’ (30m). The image sensor shall be a color CCD with minimum 1.5 lux sensitivity and a resolution equivalent to at least 460 NTSC TV lines. A full 360º axial pan is required with a variable pan speed not to exceed 25º per second. The camera shall have a minimum optical zoom of 10X and must maintain full resolution at the 10X zoom level. The camera shall support both automatic and remotely operable manual focus.

3. The general illumination shall be such as to allow an even distribution of light around the pipeline perimeter without the loss of contrast, flare, or abnormal shadowing. The camera must support remotely controlled onboard lights for spot illumination during PTZ operation.

4. The CCTV system must be capable of transmitting from the pipeline to the topside control center in real-time and with zero loss of clarity or detail.

D. CCTV Virtual Pan-Tilt-Zoom (VPTZ) Hi-Resolution Imaging System:

1. The CCTV VPTZ camera system must be capable of collecting hi-resolution 5 mp images during the inspection that will allow for an offline virtual pan-tilt-zoom desktop capabilities to be used in conjunction with the CCTV to allow for further offline pan-tilt-zoom capabilities.

2. Camera images shall be a taken and collected with a 185 degrees field of view spherical imaging system with a minimum of 5 mega-pixels. The data collection shall by real-time synchronized with Ethernet communication and linked to the other multi-sensors.

E. 3D Lidar /Laser Detection and Ranging System (sewers 36” diameter and larger):

1. The 3D Lidar/ Laser Detection and Ranging scanning shall provide a forward-looking three dimensional geometry model of the pipeline’s interior above the fluid level. This information is to be captured for the duration of the inspection


so that the entire pipeline is represented. The data must be displayed to the operator in real-time to ensure maximum quality and to help guide CCTV operations. The data must be logged in a digital format to enable extraction of any relevant information, such as internal pipe diameter, ovality, mortar loss, 3D location of the pipe, CAD drawings, etc.

2. The 3D Lidar/Laser Detection and Ranging scanning equipment shall be capable of directly measuring distances to objects and surfaces. It must be Class 1 (eye safe) for operator safety. Measurement must be accomplished using “time-of-flight” which measures the range of each point individually. The Laser unit must collect a minimum of 800,000 independent range measurements per minute at a resolution of 1 mm. The data collected must be forward-looking (and thus 3D) in order to capture accurate internal pipe geometry in all axes and eliminate the potential for platform alignment to impact accuracy.

3. The data collected shall be sufficiently dense and accurate to produce dimensional measurements and related ovality calculations accurate to within ±1% for data collected in pipelines with flow levels below 50% of the pipeline diameter.

4. 3D Lidar/Laser Detection and ranging scanning equipment shall have the ability to have a continuous adjustable spinning motion 360 degrees to allow for maximum data acquisition and collection and shall be able to collect 3D data point clouds.

F. 2D Laser Profiling (sewers 8” to less than 36” diameter):

1. The 2D laser profilers will generally be considered for use where 3D lasers are not applicable, which is generally in pipes smaller than 36” diameter. Calibration of the 2D laser profiler shall be checked and documented prior to conducting each inspection.

2. The 2D laser scan shall provide two a dimensional geometry model of the pipeline’s interior above the fluid level. The data must be displayed to the operator in real-time to ensure maximum quality and to help guide CCTV operations. The data must be logged in a digital format to enable extraction of any relevant information, such as internal pipe diameter, ovality, mortar loss and other features.

3. The data collected shall be sufficiently dense and accurate to produce dimensional measurements and related ovality calculations accurate to within ±1% for data collected in pipelines with flow levels below 50% of the pipeline diameter.

G. Sonar System (Submerged Portion of Pipe):


1. Sonar equipment must be specifically adapted for use in sewers using high frequency sound waves to locate and map irregularities within the pipes creating a continuous sonar images recorded in “real time” mode. This information must be captured for the duration of the inspection so that the entire pipeline is represented. The data must be displayed to the operator in real-time to ensure maximum quality and to help with platform maneuvers. The data must be logged in a digital format to enable extraction of any relevant information, such as sediment depth, pipe shape, etc.

2. The sonar unit shall be digital and capable of operating in pipelines with diameters from 16-inch to 112-inch. The sonar shall have a remotely programmable frequency range of 600 kHz to 1.0 MHz and will log 2D profile information in a numeric format.

3. The range resolution measurement error shall be no greater than 0.08 inch from a distance of 3 to 12 feet and no greater than 0.4-inch from distances of beyond 15 feet. The minimum detectable range for the sonar unit shall be 6-inches. The data collected shall be sufficiently dense and accurate to produce sediment/debris volume calculations within ±5%.

H. H2S Gas and Temperature Data Collection:

1. The presence of H2S above 2 parts per million (ppm) indicate potential sulfuric acid production, a leading cause for deterioration of concrete pipes. H2S levels in the air along with air temperature are to be captured for the duration of the inspection so that the entire pipeline is represented. The data must be logged in a digital format.

2. The sensor must be an electrochemical type capable of capturing H2S levels and temperature data. The sensor’s dynamic range shall be from 0-ppm to 200-ppm. Sensor measurement resolution shall be 0.1 ppm. Readings shall be obtained no less than once per minute. The sensor shall operate at pressures that vary from atmospheric by ±10% and in 15-90% non-condensing humidity with a 90% response time of less than 60 seconds.

3. The sensor shall provide H2S levels accurate to within ±1ppm at standard temperature and pressure. Manufacturer calibration must be made available upon request.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain on site at all times a competent field supervisor in charge of the inspection. The field supervisor shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to commencement of work. Any change of supervision must also be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to the change. The field supervisor shall be responsible for the safety of all site workers and site conditions as well as ensuring that all work is conducted in conformance with the specifications and to the level of quality specified.

B. It is the intent of the OWNER to view the majority of pipes via CCTV videos and laser profiles where possible; therefore, field work shall be scheduled during dry weather periods and/or when flows can be regulated by the City’s operation of system gates and WWTP pumping systems.

C. Each sewer section shall be assessed from the upstream manhole to the downstream manhole, if access locations permit.

D. For each manhole that is accessed for pipe assessment, CONTRACTOR shall:

1. Utilize GPS equipment to obtain X and Y state plane coordinates at sub-meter accuracy for the center of the manhole cover.

2. Field-measure the vertical distance from the top of the manhole frame to the invert.

3. Manhole information shall be included in the PACP exchange database submitted by the CONTRACTOR

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Manholes and other structures will be field located prior to pipe inspection. Manhole numbers used in documentation of the inspection will conform to the manhole numbering system used in the assignment documents, or provided by the OWNER.

B. If an assignment includes cleaning, this work shall be conducted prior to performing inspection and data collection.

3.3 CCTV INVESTIGATION

A. CCTV investigation shall meet the general requirements of Section 02651.


3.4 LASER DATA COLLECTION AND PROFILING

A. Laser profiling shall be conducted to provide data for 100% of the length of each manhole to manhole pipe section as directed.

B. Laser data collection shall be conducted in conjunction with CCTV data collection.

C. The laser unit shall be transported by a tractor where flow level and velocity permit. The laser unit may be transported by a float/boat where flow level/velocity does not allow for employment of a tractor.

3.5 SONAR DATA COLLECTION AND PROFILING

A. Sonar data collection and profiling shall be conducted to provide data for 100% of the length of each manhole to manhole pipe section as directed.

B. Sonar data collection is dependent upon a combination of flow level and debris depth. Therefore, sonar data may be collected independent of other data collection, or in conjunction with CCTV and laser data collection.

C. Depending on pipe size, debris level and flow level, the sonar unit may be transported by a tow cable, tractor or float/boat.

3.6 RESTORATION

A. Upon completion of work, the CONTRACTOR shall clean up and restore the area of his operations to a condition at least equal to original conditions. Damage to property including adjacent structures, signs, fences, trees, shrubs, lawns, sidewalks, utilities, storm drains, etc., will be the CONTRACTOR’S responsibility, and restoration of same shall be made at CONTRACTOR’S expense.

3.7 DATA PROCESSING AND SUBMITTAL

A. Processing and reporting of multi-sensor data shall be completed and submitted within 30 days of completion field work for each assigned work package.

B. All data and reports must employ a viewing application that is nonproprietary and open, without the need for a special viewer, license or application software.

C. All data files shall be formatted to facilitate upload into a Microsoft Access NASSCO PACP version 6 or later exchange database.

D. CONTRACTOR shall submit data, digital videos, digital photos, and evaluation reports in electronic format on portable external hard drive to Engineer on a on a monthly basis for the OWNER’S review. All hard drives and the information contained within shall become the property of the OWNER after submittal.


3.8 DATA FILES AND REPORTS

A. A PDF or electronic report shall be generated identifying and addressing each manhole-to-manhole sewer segment inspected. Multi-sensor data shall be reported in a format that is easily understood and interpreted by the OWNER. Summary reports shall indicate individual survey results in tabular form and shall provide a sortable list of surveys based on a user-defined description field. It shall include starting and ending manhole numbers, depths, pipe material, total survey length, pipe diameter and related information. All reports and/or submittals shall be in compliance with NASSCO PACP 6.0 or 7.0 standards where applicable.

B. CCTV data shall be recorded and provided in the PACP version 6 or later exchange format. The data shall specifically include video indexing for all observations. CCTV assessment data shall include a database file, still photos in JPEG file format, videos for each pipe segment in MPEG-4 file format and a summary report for each pipe segment in PDF file format.

C. Laser Profile Data: Laser data shall be interpreted and summarized to include:

1. A narrative describing the laser profiling platform employed, data collection procedure and data processing method.

2. A narrative, tables, figures and graphics detailing dimensions, corrosion levels, pipe eccentricity, ovality, features and defects.

D. Sonar Profile Data: Sonar data shall be interpreted and summarized to include:

1. A narrative describing the sonar platform type, data collection procedure and data processing method.

2. A narrative, tables, figures and graphics detailing dimensions, sediment volume and locations, sediment levels, pipe eccentricity and ovality of the submerged pipeline.

3. A profile of the debris levels for the entire length of pipe assessed.

E. H2S Data: H2S data shall be summarized to include:

1. A narrative describing the H2S collection procedure.

2. A narrative, tables, figures and graphics detailing the locations where the pipe contains average concentrations of H2S gas above the 2.0 ppm level necessary for the production of sulfuric acid (H2SO4). The overall average of the H2S gas concentration (in ppm) in the specific pipe segment shall be illustrated in graph and table form. The average temperature over the distance along the specific pipe segment being assessed shall be illustrated via a line graph.


PART 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. CONTRACTOR shall review each data set prior to submission, including CCTV videos, to assure its quality and accuracy and shall reacquire or revise the data as needed to correct any quality issues or inaccuracies. CONTRACTOR shall provide an itemized list of each record reviewed, the components reviewed, identify who performed the review and the date the review was performed with each submission.

B. If the quality of field-collected data is not sufficient as determined by the OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall re-inspect the applicable line segments and provide a new CCTV/Sonar/Laser report at no additional cost to the OWNER.

END OF SECTION

Cleaning of Sewers 02760-1 5/2017

SECTION 02760

CLEANING OF SEWERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. The Work detailed in this Section includes cleaning of sewer pipelines and manholes in preparation for sewer rehabilitation or for inspection and condition assessment.

2. Cleaning work includes but is not limited to:

a. Removal of roots, loose sediment or debris, sludge, stones, grease and

hard deposits (excluding concrete tailings). b. Trimming of protruding service connections (paid separately). c. Transportation and disposal of waste and sediment.

3. Measurement and payment for Sewer Cleaning is defined in Section 01150.

B. Related Work Specified in other Sections: The Work of the following Sections

specifically apply to the Work of this Section. Other Sections of the Specifications not referenced below shall also apply to the extent required for proper performance of Work

1. Section 02150 - Bypass Pumping 2. Section 02651 - Television Inspection

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Light cleaning is defined as a minimum of one pass (a pass meaning travel up the pipe and pull-back) and a maximum of three passes with the high velocity hydraulic-cleaning equipment. CONTRACTOR shall employ the nozzle type, size and configuration and flow capacity (minimum 80 GPM) applicable to the size, configuration and condition of existing pipes.

B. Heavy cleaning is defined as removing all obstructions and debris including but not limited to grease, concrete or grout in an unlimited number of passes by high velocity hydraulic-cleaning equipment after using buckets, scrapers, scooters, porcupines, kites, heavy-duty brushes, metal pigs, cutters, chemical root treatment, chemical grease treatment, and other debris removing equipment. Mechanical root


cutters may be used in conjunction with the hydraulic-cleaning to loosen hardened debris, roots, and grease. Notify the City if obstructions and debris that cannot be removed through the use of the means and methods specified. The City will make a determination whether the CONTRACTOR is relieved of further cleaning passes after the notification.

C. Man-entry sewer cleaning is defined as manual removal of all obstructions and

debris including but not limited to bricks, rock, concrete, or grout by man-entry into the sewer after heavy cleaning has been unsuccessful or it is predetermined by review of CCTV for a given sewer. Man-entry sewer cleaning may include using buckets, scrapers, hammers, chisels, air hammers and other debris removing equipment. Payment for man-entry sewer pipe cleaning shall be made using the hourly pay items. Entry into manholes to assist in the remote pipe cleaning process or to remove debris is not considered man-entry hourly work.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS

A. This Contract requires work in active sewer manholes and shall follow all Federal, State and local requirements for safety when working in confined spaces. The CONTRACTOR shall conform with all guidelines by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Federal Regulations; 29 CFR Ch. XVII, Section 1910.146 Confined Space Entry.

B. Take precautions to protect sewer mains, laterals, and manholes from damage from

improper sequencing of work, cleaning process selection, or improper use of the equipment. When using hydraulically propelled devices, take precautions to ensure that the water volume or pressure does not cause damage or flooding to public or private property. Do not surcharge the sewer beyond the elevation that could cause overflow of sewage into area waterways, homes, buildings or onto the ground.

C. CONTRACTOR shall recognize that there are some conditions, such as

significantly broken or deteriorated pipe, that may preclude cleaning and related operations from being accomplished, or where damage would result if cleaning were attempted or continued. Should such conditions be encountered, CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the OWNER. Damage attributable to excessive cleaning effort or employment of improper tools must be repaired as directed by the OWNER at no additional cost.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01300 – Submittals and this Section. The following shall be submitted to the OWNER in writing prior to or at the time indicated below. Failure to do so will prevent progression of the Work to the next step.

B. With Bid Documents:


1. The Bidder’s Experience shall be submitted with the Bid. See bid forms.

2. Specifications of the sewer cleaning equipment.

C. At Pre-Construction Meeting:

1. Supervisor/laborer certifications associated with basic safety requirements

(e.g., VDOT MOT, CSE, OSHA 10-hour).

2. Project schedule, including substantial and final completion dates.

D. Weekly During Construction:

1. Updated plans and schedules.

2. Confirmation of quantities of performed work to support no less than monthly billings.

3. Bypass plans where flow exceeds capacity of a 4” bypass system, or as

otherwise directed by the OWNER.

E. Daily During Construction: 1. Post cleaning videos and CCTV reports.


A. Product Experience and Delivery: 1. Product experience shall include a minimum of:

a. Five years market experience. Documentation of experience shall include cleaning of at least 500,000 LF of pipe within the last five years.

b. Cleaning deteriorated clay, concrete, and brick circular and noncircular sewers.

c. Equipment required to access manholes and other structures on and off the road.

d. Ability to clean pipe with conventional, remotely operated equipment and via manned entry into manholes or pipes where required.

2. Quality Control and Assurance: A quality control and assurance program

shall include a minimum of management review of field reports


documenting level, type, and quality of cleaning performed, all in accordance with related specifications.

B. Contracting Firm Experience:

1. CONTRACTOR’S Safety Program: CONTRACTOR shall have a written

safety program in place that adequately describes safety performance requirements, training, internal site inspections, and reporting. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain an experience modification rate (EMR) acceptable to the City.

2. CONTRACTOR’S Experience: The CONTRACTOR shall have at least 5 years experience cleaning pipe and other work associated with and supporting CIPP projects.

3. Performance References: In addition to the general experience of the firm,

the CONTRACTOR must maintain a demonstrated and verifiable record of meeting project schedules, budgets, and quality goals.

C. Project Delivery Team:

1. The CONTRACTOR’S project delivery team (project manager, field

engineer, superintendent, foreman) shall provide adequate systems to schedule, manage, and control all activities, including subcontractor activities.

2. The CONTRACTOR’S on-site superintendent for the Work shall have a

minimum of three years concentrated pipe cleaning experience, with at least one year as a crew leader.

3. CONTRACTOR shall be capable of providing all crews and equipment as

needed to start and complete the work without undue delay

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANING EQUIPMENT

A. The CONTRACTOR shall select the method(s), equipment, and tools required to clean pipes and remove, transport, and dispose of all waste and debris. Methods and equipment include but are not limited to low or high volume and pressure jetters; vacuums, shovels, carts, or buckets; saws, grinders, or flails; remotely operated and manned entry. Particular care shall be taken to safely conduct operations without damage to existing pipe.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment capable of removing all sand, dirt,

rocks and other debris from the sewer reach to allow unobstructed remote CCTV


internal inspection of all internal surfaces and subsequent pressure testing of all sewer joints.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall certify that backup cleaning equipment is available and

will be delivered to the site within four hours of equipment breakdown.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANING

A. Prior to placing cleaning equipment into the pipe, the operator shall determine the type of nozzle; type of cutting or grinding tool; volume and pressure of water required to safely clean the pipe without damaging the existing pipe or laterals.

B. After determining the preliminary requirements and the feasibility of effective video inspection, the CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean all pipeline reaches in order to permit an unrestricted inspection by CCTV. Particular emphasis shall be placed on removing all obstructions and debris including but not limited to sediment; sludge; stones, bricks, and other objects; roots; grease; and hard deposits (excluding concrete tailings). Acceptance of pipeline cleaning shall be made upon the successful completion of the CCTV inspection and shall be defined as removing sufficient material to ensure an effective rehabilitation of the pipeline, to the satisfaction of the OWNER. If CCTV inspection shows the cleaning to be unsatisfactory, the CONTRACTOR shall be required to reclean and reinspect the pipeline at no additional cost to the OWNER.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain water required for cleaning by connection to

City fire hydrants, provided the connection is made in accordance with City requirements. Provide notice to City Agencies prior to withdrawing water from the hydrants. Connect to only yellow topped fire hydrants and not silver hydrants. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain a portable water meter from the City’s Department of Public Utilities and attach a RPZ backflow preventer to the meter in accordance with City standards. A deposit for the meter is paid to the City’s Department of Public Utilities. The contractor will pay the Department of Public Utilities for water usage at established rates. Contact the City’s Department of Public Utilities, Special Billing department (804 646-5270) for current water rates. Support meter and backflow preventer so as to not damage hydrants. Be responsible for any damage resulting from improper operation of hydrants. Do not use or obstruct a fire hydrant when there is a fire in the area. Remove water meters, fittings, and piping from fire hydrants at the end of each working day.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall not waste water from the public water supply because

of improper connections or from hydrants left opened.


E. The CONTRACTOR shall remove all bricks, rocks, debris, sludge, dirt, sand, grease, roots and other materials from the sewers as specified herein, and collect and remove the resulting debris from the downstream manholes of the sewer section being cleaned. Passing waste material between manholes will not be permitted. When necessary, a dam trap or weir and screen shall be temporarily installed in the downstream manhole in such a manner that debris and solids will be trapped and retained for subsequent removal.

F. Remove waste and debris cleaned from the sewers from the downstream manhole

by vacuum pumps or other means. Return the discharge and drainage stream to the sewer and discharge downstream for disposal. Do not dump under any circumstances sewage or solids onto the ground surface, street, or into ditches, catch basins or storm drains. If sewage is unintentionally spilled, discharged, leaked, or otherwise deposited in the open environment, be responsible for any clean-up and disinfection of the affected area, and comply with all local, State, and Federal regulatory requirements regarding spills. Place all solids and semi-solids in a watertight container so that no spillage or leakage will occur, cover to minimize odors, and dispose. Be responsible for all operations and costs associated with removal and transportation of debris collected during the cleaning operations.

1. Waste shall either be:

a. Transported to the City of Richmond Wastewater Treatment Plant

screening grit pad for temporary storage and disposal by the OWNER’s Wastewater Treatment Plant solids waste disposal contractor. The waste shall be transported and disposed off to the screening grit pad at the end of each working day. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for disposing off the waste at the grit pad without any spills from the pad and shall not allow contamination of the areas with the waste in the vicinity of the pad. The stormwater drain grate near the grit pad shall be cleared before and after each round of waste disposal.

b. Disposed in a legally-permitted disposal site, as coordinated with the OWNER.

2. As required by the OWNER, dispose of waste using a transporter that has a

valid City of Richmond Liquid Waste Transporter Permit

G. Where access to manholes in easements and rights-of-way is required, the CONTRACTOR will obtain permission for access for his equipment.

H. Barricades and warning signs shall be used in work areas and around open



I. The CONTRACTOR shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Cleaning of upstream reaches of combined sewer shall be completed before the downstream reaches are cleaned.

2. Hydro-cleaning equipment shall be inserted in the downstream manhole of

the reach, and the work shall proceed upstream; and

3. Winching equipment used shall not damage the existing pipelines.

J. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for locating the pipeline specified for rehabilitation at no additional cost to the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall review plans, related information, and CCTV survey inspection videos (when available and provided by the OWNER) to locate manholes and other access points, regardless of depth, using CCTV, locator equipment and any other means necessary. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for uncovering buried or paved over manholes up to three inches from surface. Uncovering and raising of frames and covers will be paid under applicable line items. CONTRACTOR is responsible for any site clearing and restoration associated with accessing manholes. The cost of this work is not separately paid and is included in work items as detailed in Section 01150

K. Any blockages of lateral building connections resulting from the cleaning or other

items of work shall be removed by cleaning of the building connection by the CONTRACTOR, at its own expense. Any damage caused by flooding of lateral building connections shall be corrected by the CONTRACTOR, at its own expense and the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER

3.2 REMOVAL OF PROTRUDING SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Remove and clear service connections protruding more than ½-inch into the host pipe for 8” to 18” main lines, and more than 1-inch into the host pipe for main lines 20” diameter and above. The CONTRACTOR shall trim the protruding service connections using any means commercially practicable, including cutters/grinders powered by cleaning equipment or specialized robotic equipment (including CIPP tap robots). Chain flail or similar devices intended for trimming taps shall be submitted for approval prior to use in the field. The CONTRACTOR shall cut/grind the intruding service connections to within ½” of the inner wall of the host pipe.

B. If clearing an intruding service connection remotely is not possible, the

CONTRACTOR shall contact the OWNER. Upon approval of the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR may be directed to make arrangements for the removal and replacement of the intruding service connection as specified in Section 02762 – Lateral Reinstatement.


C. The CONTRACTOR shall employ experienced personnel, select appropriate equipment, and take reasonable care (including monitoring via CCTV) while trimming services. The CONTRACTOR shall record the trimming operation and submit these videos upon request by the OWNER. If the main or lateral pipe is damaged to the extent a point repair is required as a result of the trimming operation, the OWNER will pay for the point repair, if the operators are shown to have taken reasonable care. If operators are shown to have operated without appropriate care, the CONTRACTOR may be required to pay the cost of the point repair.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall place a screen at the downstream manhole to prevent

cut material flowing downstream. The cut material shall be removed and disposed of as specified.

E. Video recording shall be made of the intruding break-in-service connection before

and after the grinding operation as specified in Section 02651 – Television Inspection. DVDs shall be submitted to the OWNER.

F. Where there are multiple protruding services in a line section, payment for

trimming services in addition to those initially designated for trimming will only be made to the extent the additional trimming is necessary to get the cutting tool to the location of the services initially designated for trimming.

END OF SECTION

02900-1 9/2015

SECTION 02900

LANDSCAPING WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Soil, soil preparation, soil tests, excavation, planting, seeding, sodding, pruning, edging, fertilizing and maintenance.

B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections Includes, But is Not Limited to, the

Following: 1.2 REFERENCES


1. ASTM C 33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates 1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Soil Tests: Submit soil test results.

C. Maintenance Instruction Manual: Upon completion of the landscaping work and

prior to final payment, furnish seeded and plant material maintenance instructions. Include instructions on the recommended maintenance procedures to be followed for maintaining lawns and each species of plant material. Include information on all planted and seeded materials and all pertinent growing and maintenance information and requirements for watering, fertilizing, lime applications, spraying, cultivating, pruning and weed control.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. General: Deliver, store and handle all products and materials as specified in Division 1 and as follows.

B. Top Soil: Deliver top soil in a dry state without enough moisture to allow it to be

packed or squeezed into a ball.

02900-2 9/2015

C. Balled and Bare Root Plants: Immediately after delivery, set all balled plants on the ground with the balls well protected with soil. Water and properly maintain all plants until planting. Plant or heel in bare rooted plants which cannot be planted immediately upon delivery. No materials heeled in for more than a week may be used. Before the roots are covered, open bundler and separate the plants.

D. Grass Seed: Deliver grass seed in standard size bags of the vendor, showing

weight, analysis and name of vendor. Store the seed so as not to impair its effectiveness.

E. Sod: Deliver sod to the site in fresh condition and within two days of the time it

has been dug.

F. Fertilizer: Deliver fertilizer mixed as specified, in standard size bags, showing weight, analysis and the name of the manufacturer. Store the fertilizer in a weatherproof storage place in a manner that will keep it dry without affecting its effectiveness.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Seeding and Sodding: Sow grass seed. Sow seed when the wind velocity is below 5 mph. Place sod between seasons or as ordered by the OWNER which are normal for such work as determined by weather conditions and accepted practice in the locality and as approved.

B. Planting: Unless otherwise directed, plant deciduous material from March 1st to

June 1st and from September 1st to December 1st. Plant evergreen material from April 1st to June 1st and from September 1st to November 1st.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General: Apply the warranty to all seeded, sodded and planted areas. Have the warranty period commence after the final acceptance of all landscaping work exclusive of all replacement plant materials.

B. Seeded and Plant Material: Warranty plant materials for a period of one year.

C. Seeded Areas: Warranty seeded lawn areas to the time of establishment of an

acceptable uniform stand of grass.

D. Sod: Warranty sod to 30 days following the first cutting.

E. Replacement: Replace plant material and resod or reseed only during the specified planting seasons and warranty the replacement material for the same period of time as the original material.

02900-3 9/2015

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL

A. Topsoil: Provide a natural friable top soil of the region, rich in organic matter, without any material toxic to plant growth and of uniform quality, free of large roots, sticks, hard clay, weeds, brush, and stones over 1-inch in maximum dimension or other litter or waste products. Provide topsoil containing no decomposed stone, salts or alkali, and not less than 15 parts per million of available nitrates, 3 parts per million of available phosphorus, 15 parts per million of potash, and having a pH of not less than 6.0 nor more than 7.2 at a depth of 8 inches below the surface of the field from which it is removed. Provide topsoil with a mechanical analysis as follows:

Sieve Percentage

Passing

1 inch 100

1/4 inch 97-100

No. 100 40- 60

B. Planting Soil: Prepare planting soil by mixing 10 parts of topsoil with fertilizer and 1 part of peat moss.

2.2 GRASS SEED AND SOD

A. Grass Seed: Provide a fresh, clean, new crop of grass seed composed of 10 percent Creeping Red Fescue, 15 percent Red Top, 65 percent Improved Kentucky Blue Grass and 10 percent Domestic Rye. Provide seed components free of noxious weed seeds and having not less than the following purity and germination:

Component Percent Purity

Percent Germination

Kentucky Blue Grass 85 80

Creeping Red Fescue 95 90

Red Top 98 90

Domestic Rye 98 87

Tag each sack in accordance with the agricultural seed laws of the United States and the State of Virginia. Show on each tag the producer's guarantee as to the year grown, the percentage of purity, the percentage of germination and the tests by which the percentages were determined. Provide seed for this project having a test date within 6 months of the date of sowing.

02900-4 9/2015

B. Sod: Provide nursery-grown Improved Kentucky Blue Grass sod, free of weeds, a minimum of 1-inch thick of dense growth and cut with sharp edges in 18-inch widths and not less than 3 feet long. Sod which has been grown on peat or which has been dug more than two days previous to delivery or which has been allowed to have the roots dry out or on which the grass has turned brown will not be accepted.

2.3 PLANT MATERIALS

A. General: Provide plant materials that are true to species or variety, sound, healthy, vigorous acclimated plants free from defects, disfiguring knots, sun-scaled injuries, abrasions of the bark, plant diseases and insect eggs, borers and all other forms of infestations. Provide material that has normal, well-developed branch systems and vigorous root systems and that is freshly dug, nursery-grown stock grown under the same climatic conditions as the Project location. Provide material grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project for at least 2 years and transplanted or root pruned at least in the last 3 years.

B. Plant Size: Dimension a plant as it stands in its natural position. Measure trees

less than 4 inches in caliper at a point 6 inches above the ground. Provide the stock of a fair average of the minimum and maximum sizes specified. Do not cut back large shrubs to sizes specified. Furnish the following plant sizes:

1. Bald Cypress, 2-4-inches in caliper 2. Tulip Poplar, 1-2-inches in caliper 3. Sycamore, 1-2-inches in caliper 4. Crabapple, 1-2-inches in caliper 5. Red Mulberry, 1-2-inches in caliper 6. Hawthorne, 3-inches in caliper 7. Drooping Leucothoe, 1-inch in caliper 8. Little Gem Magnolia, 24-inch in caliper 9. Crepe Myrtle, 1-2-inch in caliper

C. Balled, Burlapped and Platformed Plants: Dig balled and burlapped, as well as

balled and platformed, plants with sufficient roots and a solid ball of earth securely held in place by burlap and stout natural fiber rope. Manufactured balls are not acceptable. Provide balled and platformed plants with sturdy platforms of a size equal to the diameter of the horizontal midsection of the ball of earth.

D. Bare-Rooted Plants: Dig bare-rooted plants with sufficient root spread and depth

to ensure full recovery and development of the plants. Cover roots for these plants with a uniformly thick coating of mud by being puddled immediately after they are dug.

E. Inspection: Submit plants to inspection for approval upon delivery at the project

site or during the progress of the work, for size and condition of balls or roots, diseases, insects, and latent defects or injuries. Remove rejected plants

02900-5 9/2015

immediately from the site. Do not substitute plants for those specified unless approved.

2.4 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER

A. Provide all commercial mixture fertilizer uniform in composition, free flowing, conforming to state and federal laws and suitable for application with equipment designed for that purpose. Provide fertilizer with organic, inorganic or combined elements with the following composition by weight:

1. Nitrogen 10 percent 2. Phosphorus pentoxide 10 percent 3. Potash 10 percent

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Tree Wrap: Provide new, clean, plain, 8-ounce weight burlap material 6 inches wide for wrapping tree trunks.

B. Weed Barrier Fabric: Provide Pro-5 fabric as manufactured by the DeWitt Co., or

equal.

C. Gravel: Provide smooth river bed gravel of solid or mixed color range to be as selected and meeting the requirements of ASTM C 33 and graded according to Size No. 467, Table II.

D. Mulch: Provide ground corn cobs, wood chips, tree barks, buckwheat hulls or

other approved materials for mulch.

E. Edging: Provide commercial hot-rolled steel edging plate, 4 inches wide and 1/8-inch thick. Fabricate edging in sections with loops pressed from or welded to the face of sections at 30-inch centers to receive 16-inch long tapered steel stakes. Provide edging finished with the manufacturer's standard paint.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GRADES

A. General: Existing and final contours shown depict finished grades after completion of landscaping work.

B. Lawn Grades: Grade lawns to meet walks, curbs and adjoining surfaces after

uniform settlement of surfaces. Correct water pockets or ridges which appear after surface settlement takes place on or before the end of the guarantee period.

02900-6 9/2015

3.2 EXCAVATION FOR PLANTING

A. General: Obtain approval for all plant locations before excavation. Remove from the site all material that is surplus and unsuitable for backfill.

B. Ground Cover and Grass Areas: Excavate for ground cover and grass areas to the

required depths for grass to receive 6 inches of topsoil and for groundcover to receive 6 inches of planting soil.

C. Plant Pits: Excavate plant pits with vertical sides and a circular outline.

1. Dig tree and evergreen pits at least twice the diameter of the ball, and deep

enough to permit an 8-inch layer of compacted planting soil beneath the ball.

2. Dig shrub pits a minimum of twice the diameter of the ball and deep enough to allow 6 inches of compacted planting soil beneath the ball.

D. Drain: Install french drains for all trees, ornamental trees, and evergreens planted

on berms and other locations where the grade permits, from bottom of planting pit to the finished grade with a trench 9 inches wide, filled with a 6-inch thick layer of 3/4-inch washed gravel. Cover the gravel layer with a filter mat before backfilling the trench with soil.

3.3 SOIL CONDITIONING

A. Disking: Before the application of topsoil, sodding or seeding, disk the area to be seeded, sodded or planted with groundcover to a depth of 6 inches. Continue the disking until the subsoil surface is sufficiently broken to provide a good bond between subsoil and topsoil. Spread 6 inches of planting soil over the disked area to a uniform depth and density.

B. Ground Limestone: Incorporate ground limestone, if required by the results of the

soil test report, into the upper 3 inches of planting soil. Uniformly spread fertilizer and mix into the soil to a depth of 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.4 SEEDING AND SODDING

A. Seeding: Sow seed at the rate recommended by the seed producer. Evenly rake the surface after seeding with a fine-tooth rake. Mulch all newly seeded areas and cover with a minimum of 1/4-inch of straw or hay, approximately at the rate of 1 bale per 1,000 square feet, then thoroughly wet.

B. Sodding: Perform sodding only if requested by the OWNER. Lay sod in such a

manner that the surface is smooth and even and all edges abut one another tightly. Water and roll sod so that a bond is produced between the prepared topsoil and the

02900-7 9/2015

sod. On slopes greater than 3 to 1, stake installed sod with approved wooden sod stakes at a minimum rate of three stakes per square yard of sod.

3.5 PLANTING

A. Layout: Outline locations for trees, shrubs, evergreens and bed and stake for approval unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Obtain location approval prior to commencing planting operations.

B. Setting Plants: Set plants plumb and straight with the crown at finished grade.

Compact soil around the base of the ball, and fill the void 3/4 of the way up from the bottom. Water each plant immediately. After the water has completely drained, fill the plant pits to finished grade. Properly spread out roots of bare root plants and carefully work topsoil among them. Cut off any broken or frayed roots with a clean cut. Form a shallow basin, the size of the ball with a ridge of soil to facilitate watering. After that operation is completed, apply a second watering immediately. Finish all planting pits and beds within a period of 3 days following installation. Construct tree saucers, cultivate and outline planting pits with a neat edge, when necessary.

C. Mulching: Immediately after planting operations are completed, cover all tree and

shrub pits with mulch to a minimum depth of 2 inches. Limit mulch for trees to saucer diameter and, for shrubs, the entire shrub bed.

D. Pruning: Prune each tree and evergreen with clean, sharp tools in accordance with

standard horticultural practice to preserve the natural character of the plant. Remove suckers and all dead, broken or badly bruised branches.

E. Wrapping: Wrap the tree trunks of all trees with burlap tree wrapping securely

tied with suitable cord at top and bottom and at 2-foot intervals along the trunk. Overlap the wrapping 2 inches top and bottom and entirely cover the trunk from the ground to the height of the second branch, neat and snug.

F. Guying: Guy trees as necessary to be plumb and straight through final inspection.

Remove guy wires at completion of project.

G. Watering: During planting, thoroughly saturate the soil around each plant with water.

3.6 EDGING

A. General: Establish a neat edge where planting areas meet grass areas, with spade or edging tools, immediately after all planting and seeding is completed. Establish good flowing curves.

02900-8 9/2015

3.7 GRAVELED AREAS

A. General: Lay a weed barrier in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and top with a 4-inch layer of gravel. Edge graveled areas with metal edging.

END OF SECTION

EXHIBIT – A

NOT USED

EXHIBIT – B

City of Richmond

Health, Safety, and Environment Management Plan

Health, Safety, and Environment Management Plan

Prepared by: City of Richmond Department of Public Utilities 900 E Broad St Richmond, Virginia 23219 August 2008

Health, Safety, and Environment Management Plan City of Richmond August 2008

i

Table of Contents

1.0 CONTRACTOR HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS ....................... 1

1.1 Security Requirements.................................................................................................................... 1

2.0 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................... 1

3.0 DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 2

4.0 HSE TRAINING/COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 3

5.0 BASIC HSE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................ 3

6.0 CERTIFICATION, INSPECTIONS, AND REGULATORY AGENCY PERMITS ........................ 8

7.0 SITE OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................................... 8

7.1 Clearing and Grubbing ................................................................................................................... 9 7.2 Landfill Operations ....................................................................................................................... 10 7.3 Drilling ......................................................................................................................................... 10 7.4 Excavation and Trenching ............................................................................................................ 13 7.5 Overhead Electrical Lines ............................................................................................................ 15 7.6 Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work. ...................................................................................... 17 7.7 Heavy Equipment ......................................................................................................................... 19 7.8 Traffic/Pedestrian Safety .............................................................................................................. 23 7.9 Flammable and Combustible Materials ........................................................................................ 23 7.10 Compressed Gases ....................................................................................................................... 24 7.11 Underground Work ...................................................................................................................... 25 7.12 Poisonous Plants, Insects and Animals Indigenous to Virginia ................................................... 27

8.0 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION ..................................................................................................... 28

9.0 HSE SURVEYS ............................................................................................................................... 28

10.0 PLANNING AND OBSERVATION PROCEDURES ................................................................ 29

11.0 ACCIDENT/INCIDENT INVESTIGATION .............................................................................. 29

12.0 DRUGS, ALCOHOL, AND CONTRABAND ............................................................................ 30

13.0 MEDICAL AND EXPOSURE MONITORING .......................................................................... 31

14.0 IMMINENT DANGER SITUATIONS ....................................................................................... 31

15.0 HSE ADHERENCE POLICY ...................................................................................................... 32


ii

Attachments Attachment 1 Local Hospital’s Map

Addenda


1

1.0 CONTRACTOR HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS It is the policy of City of Richmond (COR) to select, contract with, and oversee Contractors with the same priority and emphasis on Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) protection as we practice for our own employees. It is a contractual requirement that Contractors comply with all applicable COR, client, State, and Federal health, safety, and environmental regulations. This HSE Management Plan specifies COR’s HSE requirements that may exceed OSHA standards or the Contractors’ normal HSE procedures. Contractors are responsible for reviewing and implementing the HSE requirements set forth in this Management Plan. Contractors are also responsible for ensuring that their lower tier Contractors review and implement these HSE requirements when activities and/or scope of work changes, an addendum to this document will be generated. 1.1 Security Requirements All Contractors will enter the project and sign in (designated foreman/supervisor) on a daily basis. Attachment 1 shows all hospitals located within and around the City of Richmond in the event of an incident or accident. Based on the schedule, activities, and Contractors on site, a mandatory meeting will be held at an agreeable time at with all Contractors and a COR representative to discuss when operations/activities are occurring, hours worked, number of personnel with each respective Contractor, etc. Visitors will be required to check-in at one of the designated entrances and sign in. Visitors will be escorted at all times by a COR official and/or Contractor representative. If visitors tour the site, they are required to wear protective equipment to include safety shoes, hard hat, safety glasses, and high-visibility vest. The site will provide the hard hat, safety glasses (non-prescription), and vest. This policy also applies to regulatory agency (e.g., Virginia Occupational Safety and Health Administration (VOSHA), Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ), etc.) personnel visiting the site. Upon arrival to the site entrance, regulatory personnel will be asked to sign in and remain until COR officials are notified and arrive at the Project Site. Parking for all Contractors (company and personal vehicle) will be in a designated parking area. Only construction vehicles (dump trucks, cranes, etc.) will be allowed to enter the work area. A wash bay will be available for construction vehicles to utilize prior to entering the COR streets. 2.0 DEFINITIONS

Term Definition

Accident/Incident An unplanned, undesirable event that disrupts work activity.

COR City of Richmond (COR) in which these Contractor HSE requirements are incorporated.

Safe Plan of Action (SPA)

A task-specific planning document used to help ensure that every task receives proper HSE assessment and planning. Also referred to as a Job Safety Analysis (JSA) and/or Task Hazard Analysis.

Contractor The party, including “subconsultants”, defined in the subcontract with COR for which


2

Term Definition

these Contractor Health, Safety, and Environmental Requirements are incorporated. Contractor Health, Safety, and Environmental Requirements shall extend to and govern Contractor’s Contractors, vendors, employees, and others under its direction or control.

Site/Project Management

The highest-ranking COR representative or designated agent whose regular work location/office is at the project site.

Task Safety Awareness (TSA)

A review of the SPA among the crew and supervisor to discuss and resolve any HSE issues before work is continued, when there has been a break in the work schedule, change in work conditions, change in crew, etc.

SSO The contractor Site Safety Officer

Work The total of the Contractor’s responsibilities as set forth in the Contract Documents.

COR Site HSE A COR employee designated to provide safety direction.

3.0 DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 3.1 A project-specific HSE Action Plan or, in the case of hazardous waste operations, a site-specific

Health and Safety Plan (HASP), must be generated by each Contractor mobilizing on the project. This plan must include a project-specific Emergency Response Action Plan in accordance with COR, Client, State, and Federal requirements.

3.2 If the portion of the project is regulated as a hazardous waste or emergency response operation

(HAZWOPER), as defined in 29CFR 1926.65 or 29CFR 1910.120, then the Contractor will develop a HASP that outlines how hazard agents (chemical/physical/environmental) will be identified and controlled to include air monitoring with Direct Reading Instrumentation (DRI). Contractor site personnel working in this area shall read and acknowledge by signature that they will comply with the applicable HASP. In addition, any Contractor and/or Subcontractor working in adjacent non-HAZWOPER areas will be briefed on work activities and associated hazard(s) in the event of an incident or release if DRI levels exceed established “action levels,” COR officials will be immediately informed.

3.3 Contractor shall furnish to the COR the names and qualifications of the Competent Persons and

Qualified Persons, who may be required for their scope of work by Federal, State, or local regulations. Examples include Competent Persons and/or Qualified Persons for steel erection, excavation, scaffold erection, confined space entry, annual crane inspections, etc.

3.4 Contractors are responsible for maintaining a First Aid Register for all employee injuries and

illness reported on the project. First Aid kits will be provided by all Contractors and at least one person on site from each company will be current and trained in First Aid and CPR.

3.5 Contractors must immediately inform the COR Site/Project Management of any OSHA, EPA, or

other HSE regulatory agencies’ inspections or other actions involving the Contractor’s work. 3.6 Contractor employees must promptly report all potentially work-related incidents, injuries, or

illnesses to their Supervisor or their Site HSE Representative.


3

3.7 Contractor must promptly report all potentially work-related incidents, injuries, or illnesses to the

COR Site/Project Management or COR Site HSE Representative, after the appropriate level of medical assistance has been arranged.

3.8 Injuries, illnesses, or any incident involving a third party or a member of the general public must

be promptly reported to the Site/Project Management. 3.9 Incidents involving potential exposures to hazardous materials and releases or spills of such

materials must be promptly reported to the Site/Project Management. 3.10 Accident investigation reports for all Contractor accidents, injuries, and work-related illnesses

shall be forwarded to the Site/Project Management within twenty-four hours of the occurrence. 3.11 Contractor employees are required to participate in documented, daily task-specific Safe Plans of

Action and regular Safety Observation Reports. 3.12 Contractors will conduct weekly HSE meetings, and signed copies of the meeting reports shall be

made available to the COR upon request. 4.0 HSE TRAINING/COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Contract employees must complete HSE training required by applicable COR, Client, State, and

Federal HSE requirements. Such training may include, but is not limited to, OSHA 10-Hour Construction Safety & Health Outreach Program, Safety Leadership Training for Supervisory Personnel, and ergonomics training. Documentation of all HSE training shall be maintained at the project site by the Contractor and provided to the COR upon request.

4.2 Workers involved with hazardous waste operations, as defined by 29 CFR 1910.120 or equivalent

applicable State regulations, shall have met, prior to any field work activity or exposure, the training requirements of the standard to include OSHA 40-Hour HAZWOPER Training. Certification of individual worker training shall be provided to COR prior to commencing work.

4.3 Contractors must certify that all operators of mobile equipment such as forklifts, cranes, boom

lifts, buses, etc., have been trained and/or certified on the proper operation of the equipment. Copies of this training and certification shall be maintained on the project site by the Contractor and forwarded to the COR upon request. Mobile crane operators must be qualified on each specific crane (type & rating) that they are assigned to operate through a testing and qualification procedure recognized by COR. Backup alarms will be functional and tested on a daily basis.

4.4 Contractors must establish a prompt and effective method of providing HSE communications

such as HSE alerts, advisories, bulletins, regulatory updates, etc., to all site employees. 5.0 BASIC HSE REQUIREMENTS


4

The following HSE rules list COR’s fundamental requirements for Contractor HSE. When there are multiple rules that may apply, the most stringent COR, Client, State, or Federal HSE regulations that govern the work shall be followed. 5.1 Each Contractor shall appoint an on-site HSE representative, who will attend regular COR HSE

meetings and be responsible for implementation of the rules listed below, as well as other HSE rules determined, by the COR, to be necessary for the safe execution of the project. COR shall determine appropriate qualifications for Contractor HSE personnel, based on project demands.

5.2 Hard hats (ANSI Z89.1 or equivalent) shall be worn at all times (e.g. construction, environmental

operations, operations or maintenance environment), regardless of the workers activities. This includes welders when using welding hoods.

5.3 Shirts with at least four-inch sleeves shall be worn at all times. No tank tops are allowed. Loose

or frayed clothing, loose or hanging long hair, ties, rings, body jewelry, etc. shall not be worn around moving machinery or other areas where they may become tangled.

5.4 Hearing protection shall be worn when exposures exceed 85 DBA and/or during work with heavy

equipment. 5.5 Hard-toe footwear (ANSI Z41.1, or equivalent) shall be worn by all workers when in the

construction environment or in areas where there is a danger of foot injuries due to falling, rolling, or piercing objects or when employee’s feet are exposed to electrical hazards.

5.6 Safety glasses with rigid side shields (ANSI Z87.1, or equivalent) shall be worn at all times when

in the construction environment and in any area where eye hazards exist. This includes under welding hoods and for workers with prescription eye wear. Safety goggles may be worn over non-safety prescription eyewear.

5.7 Face shields must be worn in addition to safety glasses when grinding, chipping, jack hammering,

and power sawing or when conducting other tasks that involve such face and/or eye hazards. 5.8 Gloves, appropriate for the hazard present, shall be worn when hands are exposed to absorption

of harmful substances, cuts, abrasions, punctures, biological hazards, chemical burns, thermal burns, or harmful temperature extremes.

5.9 Contractor shall comply with the COR’s 100% Fall Protection Policy. This policy states that

“anytime employees are working from an unprotected elevation of six feet or more, fall protection must be used.” Working as stated above means while traveling, stationary, or at anytime exposed to a fall from a surface not protected by approved handrails, guardrails or some other approved fall elimination device. COR prohibits the use of positioning devices as the sole means of fall protection when working above six feet. Positioning device means a body belt or body harness system rigged to allow a worker to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall, and work with both hands free.


5

5.10 The use of “passive” systems, such as safety nets, monitoring systems, or controlled access zones, as the sole means of fall protection when working above six feet, is prohibited. COR prohibits the use of safety nets as an independent means of fall protection.

5.11 Workers in mechanical lifts, including scissor lifts, boom trucks, suspended or supported

personnel baskets, articulating lifts, and other similar devices must use fall protection equipment at all times. Handrails on lifts may only be used for fall protection anchor points if approved by a Qualified Person. Such devices shall not be used as elevators to transport workers to different work locations.

5.12 All portable ladders must be clearly marked with the ladder owner’s name. 5.13 The safest means of worker access for overhead work (e.g., rolling scaffolds, mechanical lifts,

platform ladders, etc.) shall be considered as alternatives to the use of portable ladders. If ladders are used, then the top of all straight and extension ladders shall be tied to a substantial anchor point before use; a second worker must hold the ladder until the tie-off is secure. And, if a worker’s feet are on or above the fifth rung of a stepladder, the top of the ladder must be tied to a substantial anchor or a second worker must hold the ladder throughout the task.

5.14 When ascending or descending a portable ladder, three-point contact is considered acceptable fall

protection for fall exposures of less than 20 feet. When potential fall exposure exceeds 20 feet, personnel on ladders must be protected with a personal fall arrest system.

5.15 Decking sections shall be laid tightly and immediately secured upon placement to prevent

accidental movement. During initial placement, decking sections shall be placed in such a manner to ensure full support by structural members and each piece shall be individually secured. Pre-installation or shake-out of multiple sections of decking using temporary methods of attachment, such as tack welding, is not allowed. The use of controlled decking zones is not allowed.

5.16 Work over or adjacent to water requires a specific safe work plan which must be approved by the

COR before work begins. This includes, but is not limited to, rivers, lakes, canals, settlement ponds, and open tanks containing liquids. United States Coast Guard-approved Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs) must be worn when working over or adjacent to water. When working over water or adjacent to water without 100% fall protection, PFDs that will provide an unconscious user floatation in a face-up position must be used. Personnel shall not work over water alone.

5.17 Equipment and tools shall not be altered in any way to adapt it for a job for which the

manufacturer does not intend it. The manufacturer of the equipment must approve any such adaptations or alterations to equipment in writing. Only trained and authorized persons shall operate machinery or equipment.

5.18 All hand-held power tools must be equipped with constant pressure switches that will

automatically shut off power when the pressure (worker’s hand) is removed. Hand-held power tools with on/off or lock-on switches are not allowed.


6

5.19 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters shall be used to protect all temporary electrical wiring and cord sets. The use of assured grounding (quarterly equipment inspections) in lieu of GFCIs is not an option.

5.20 Lock-out/tag-out procedures shall be followed to minimize the potential exposure of workers to

hazardous energy. Hazardous pipelines or vessels will be isolated by using a double block and bleed system or by blanking. Every effort must be made to de-energize electrical equipment to be worked on and other electrical equipment in the area that may affect the work. If the equipment cannot be isolated or de-energized, written approval must be obtained from the COR’s Site Manager and Operations Manager before work proceeds. Only “Qualified Electricians” may work on energized or potentially energized circuits. See 29 CFR 1910.332 for qualified electrician requirements. COR considers equipment rated at 480 volts and above as “high voltage.”

5.21 Contractor shall comply with the provisions of NFPA 70E, “Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.” Contractors shall ensure that their employees are trained in safe work practices, and that they are qualified, and that they are provided equipment, tools, and personal protective equipment (PPE) that are specified in NFPA 70E.

5.22 Confined space entry work must follow a documented hazard assessment and safe work planning

process, which must be submitted to the COR for review prior to entry per 29 CFR 1910.146.

• As part of project planning activities, all on-site confined spaces that may be entered will be identified, evaluated, and classified (permit-required vs. non-permit-required). Likewise, confined spaces discovered during work activities, and which will require entry, will also be evaluate and classified.

• All permit-required confined spaces will be labeled so that employees are adequately warned of the potential for hazardous atmospheres. Labeling is not required under the following circumstance:

o The spaces are easily recognizable, numerous, and widely spaced (e.g., storm sewer manholes). Employees will be instructed that these constitute confined spaces during required training. However, these locations will be included on the inventory.

o A complete inventory has been developed, all personnel have been trained in the use of the inventory, and the workers consult the inventory prior to performance of any work that may require entry into a confined space.

• When non-permit-required confined spaces require the implementation of confined space entry procedures because of specific work operations (e.g., painting, welding), all entry points will be labeled so as to alert all employees of the existence of the hazardous conditions. These signs will be removed only when the hazard no longer exists (e.g., complete curing of the paint).

• Non-permit-required confined spaces can be designated by only a Certified Industrial Hygienist, Certified Safety Professional, or Professional Engineer, or a competent person with appropriate confined space training and experience after review of the space(s), historical monitoring data, and other factors (e.g., injuries that have occurred). Therefore, all confined spaces will be considered permit-required, unless specifically designated as non-permit space, in writing, be a COR professional.


7

5.23 High-visibility reflective safety vests (ANSI/ISEA 107, Class III, or equivalent) must be worn by all personnel.

5.24 Motor vehicles and mobile equipment shall never be left running without an operator at the

controls. Proper use of seatbelts by all occupants is mandatory. Motor vehicle operators are prohibited from using a mobile phone or two-way radio. This applies to both hands-free and non-hands-free devices. If the use of such a device by the motor vehicle operator is necessary, it is only allowed when the motor vehicle is stationary and in a safe location off the roadway. If required by the client, the use of two-way radios is allowed, provided that written approval by the relevant COR official is obtained and only while on a project location or within a client facility.

5.25 Mobile crane lifts of over 50 tons, which exceed 85% of the crane’s capacity, involve more than

one crane, lifts a non-rigid object, or lifts over active work areas or public property are considered “critical lifts” and require written approval from COR.

5.26 All outriggers on mobile cranes must be fully extended and fully deployed when the crane is used

to lift or support a load. If, due to configuration or physical location, all outriggers cannot be fully deployed, calculations must be made from the “on-rubber” section of the load chart. On-rubber lifts and pick-and-carry operations require COR Site Manager’s written approval.

5.27 Anti two-block devices that automatically disengage crane hoist/boom functions when the hook

or block approaches the jib or boom tip are required on all cranes. 5.28 Multiple lift rigging (Christmas tree lifts) is not allowed without written approval by the COR’s

Senior HSE Manager and development of a written site-specific plan to prevent exposure to overhead loads during such lifts.

5.29 Field supervisors for the Contractor are responsible for protecting their workers from heat and

cold stress conditions by incorporating protective measures, PPE, and adequate fluid and food intake.

5.30 Eating and drinking will be permitted only in designated areas at COR project sites. Smoking will

be permitted only in areas designated by Field Supervisors and situated in locations that are not in the immediate vicinity of activities associated with work site activities. Additionally, Field Supervision will designate each smoking area giving primary consideration to those personnel who do not smoke.

Personnel actively involved in the performance of certain activities will not be permitted to

smoke, eat, drink, or use smokeless tobacco, except during breaks (e.g. HAZWOPER Controlled work areas).

Site personnel will first wash hands and face after completing work activities and prior to eating

or drinking. 5.31 Adequate illumination will be provided by Contractors during work in the evening/night.


8

6.0 CERTIFICATION, INSPECTIONS, AND REGULATORY AGENCY PERMITS 6.1 Certain operations may require a client and/or owner permit. Such activities may include but are

not limited to hot work, confined space/vessel entry, excavations, asbestos abatement, lead abatement, etc. The Contractor representative shall ask COR Site/Project Management whether any parts of the Contractor’s activities require a client and/or owner permit.

6.2 Contractors are responsible for securing and complying with all city, state, and federal permits. 6.3 A third-party certified Competent Person shall make a thorough annual inspection of all cranes

and powered hoisting equipment. Cranes assembled on site shall receive an annual inspection prior to being put into service. Documentation of all crane inspections shall be provided to the COR and must be maintained on site by the Contractor.

6.4 All scaffolding must be inspected and tagged by a Competent Person prior to initial use, before

each work shift, and after any event that could affect its structural integrity. Suspended scaffolds must receive documented daily pre-use inspections. Untagged scaffolds must not be used.

6.5 Mobile equipment must receive daily pre-use inspections, which will be documented. Examples

include forklifts, backhoes, personnel lifts/manlifts, etc. 7.0 SITE OPERATIONS Contractors shall include planning for environmental compliance in the preparation of their HASP or HSE Action Plan. Issues to be considered include but are not limited to release reporting, air permits, water permits, asbestos/lead permits or notifications, hazardous waste generation and related disposal procedures, spill mitigation and clean up methods, etc. Contractor shall have a written Hazard Communication Program and comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200. A copy of the program shall be forwarded to Site/Project Management and a copy shall be in the possession of the Contractor on the site. Any potentially hazardous material or chemical brought onto the site shall be accompanied by a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). Copies of MSDSs shall be forwarded to the Site/Project Management before the product is brought onto the site. Small quantities (less than 10 gallons) of hazardous liquids, such as gasoline, diesel fuels, and solvents, brought onto the site shall be stored in a properly labeled safety container with a flame arrestor and self closing lid. Larger quantities will require the construction of a berm to contain a release. Site/Project Management shall be notified before any chemical or material is used that could create foul smelling, noxious, or toxic vapors or gasses. All accidents involving exposure to potentially hazardous materials and hazardous material releases (as defined by EPA-RCRA) must be immediately reported to the COR and the Site/Project Management. It


9

is important to report all releases or exposures even though the incident may be considered minor or no adverse health effects or symptoms are apparent at the time. 7.1 Clearing and Grubbing Chain saws Chain saws should be used with caution in order to prevent personal injury, as the cutting mechanism is unguarded. Kickback is the single biggest cause of the chain saw injuries. A kickback is the sudden and potentially violent rearward and/or upward movement of the chain saw. It is often caused by the chain striking the wood or other object on the top quadrant on the tip of the chain guide bar. It can also be caused by binding or pinching in the cut.

The operator must be completely familiar with the controls and proper use of the equipment.

• Minimum PPE required includes hardhat, steel-toe safety boots, safety glasses, hearing protection, leather gloves, and debris shield.

• Chainsaw operations require the use of chainsaw chaps (leather leggings are not suitable) • Employees working aloft in trees will use a safety belt, safety strap, tree-trimming saddle

belt, or rope saddle belt. Personnel working aloft in aerial platforms will adhere to the fall protection requirements specified.

• A high visibility reflectorized safety vest will be worn when working around vehicular traffic. Fire Prevention

• Fuel should be stored in approved metal safety cans only and labeled as to contents. • The container should have a metal spout and funnel provided, to allow for electrical bonding

during fuel transfer. • Equipment will be turned off while being refueled. • Smoking is prohibited during refueling. • After completing fueling, carefully wipe off any gasoline spilled before starting the engine. • Keep a fire extinguisher available at all times in the work area. • Keep the equipment clean of gasoline, oil, and sawdust.

Wood Chipping Hazards Wood chipping equipment should be used with extreme caution in order to prevent personal injury, as the chipping mechanism is open to receive tree branches and other wooden material. The cutting blades begin to rotate when the engine starts and slows down gradually after the engine is shut off. In addition, the following work safety practices should be observed:

• Care should be taken to avoid foreign objects such as metal, glass or rocks that could damage equipment and become projectiles.

• Personnel will not wear loose clothing, gauntlet gloves, or hand/wrist jewelry when operating a chipper.

• No part of an employee’s body will be placed on the chipper table, nor the discharge chute raised while the rotor is turning.


10

• A chipper will be fed from the side of the centerline, and the employee will immediately turn away when the brush is taken into the rotor chamber.

• Bystanders should be kept at least 25 feet away when in operation. • Never try to clear blockages by hand and always engage the chipping mechanism gradually

using the safety handle. • Brush chippers will be provided with a locking device on the ignition system that prevents

startup when the key is removed. • Access panels must be closed and secured before chippers are used. • The infeed hopper or table will be of a design to prevent an employee from reaching the rotor

blades or knives during normal operation. • Trailer-type chippers will be chocked. • The feed-openings will be protected with flap-type guards to prevent kickback of chips.

7.2 Landfill Operations

• All ground personnel must wear a high-visibility, reflective safety vest at all times. Safety vests must be visible from all angles.

• All ground personnel will yield to heavy equipment and maintain approximately 100 feet of clearance at all times while maintaining constant eye contact with the operator.

• The site supervisor must notify Site/Project management prior to allowing any worker to enter a high-traffic area. The site supervisor shall instruct Site/Project management to alert all operators when personnel will be entering traffic areas to perform assigned work. When feasible, perform work during periods of low traffic. All work performed in high traffic areas shall be performed within physical barriers, such as cones, warning tape, concrete jersey barriers, etc. Physical barriers will be set up in such a manner to be visible to all operators.

• Operators and site supervisors shall ensure all reverse warning devices are in working order prior to the operation of equipment. If any person notices an inoperable reverse warning device, that person shall immediately notify the operator and the site supervisor. Any vehicle with an inoperable reverse warning device shall be tagged and placed out of service until equipped with a working device.

7.3 Drilling

• Use common sense while maintaining a “safety-first” attitude at all times. • Know the location of underground and overhead utilities • Use required PPE, do not wear loose-fitting clothing or jewelry. Keep hair tied back and

tucked into hardhat. • Do not touch or go near moving parts. • Be aware of the location of “Emergency Shut Off” switches. • Be aware of potential contaminants. Always wear required PPE and follow appropriate

decontamination procedures. • In the event of an accident, allow properly equipped and protected personnel to respond.

Immediately leave the area. • Do not smoke or use spark-producing equipment around drilling operations. • No food will be consumed or stored in the work area. • Do not work around a drill rig during a thunderstorm or rain.


11

• Maintain orderly housekeeping on and around the drill rig. Store tools, materials, and supplies to allow safe handling by drill crewmembers. Proper storage on racks or sills will prevent spreading, rolling, or sliding. Avoid storage or transportation of tools, materials, or supplies within or on the drill rig derrick.

• Maintain working surfaces free of obstructions or potentially hazardous substances. • Store gasoline only in containers specifically designed or approved for such use. • Fire-fighting equipment should not be tampered with and should not be removed for other

than the intended fire-fighting purposes or for servicing. • The departing driller should inform the oncoming driller of any special hazards or ongoing

work that may affect the safety of the crew. • Rigging material equipment for material handling should be checked prior to use on each

shift and as often as necessary to ensure it is safe. Defective rigging should be removed from service.

• Work areas and walkways should not be obstructed. The area around the derrick ladder should be kept clear to avoid unimpeded access to the ladder. The rotary table of the rig floor shall be kept free of obstructions and free of undue accumulation of oil, water, ice, or circulating fluids.

• Passengers shall only be allowed in vehicles designed for passenger use. Do not ride on the outside of drill rigs, trailers, or other equipment.

Utility Clearance Contractors will determine the location of all underground/overhead utilities before drilling operations take place. Project management shall contact the One-Call Center for the state in which drilling is to be performed to obtain written clearance. For areas that are not covered by One-Call Centers or local utility companies (i.e., client specific utilities), clearance must be obtained from the COR. In addition to obtaining utility clearances, the appropriate party will make a utility survey of each drilling point. The utility survey shall include both magnetometer and ground-penetrating radar survey. Documentation that nearby utilities have been marked on the ground and that the drill site has been cleared shall be kept in the project trailer/support vehicle and communicated to the drilling Contractor. All utilities shall be identified on a job hazard analysis and communicated to all drilling and drill support personnel. Prior to the start of site work each day, the drilling Contractor will inspect all drilling equipment. The inspections will be documented in the field records, and the records will be maintained at the site. The drilling equipment inspection must be repeated on a daily basis. Defective equipment shall be repaired prior to use. The following are minimum specifications for performing maintenance on drilling equipment:

• Safety glasses shall be work, at a minimum, when performing maintenance on a drill rig or on the drilling tools.

• Follow all manufacturers’ recommendations for maintenance on drilling equipment. • The drill rig engine shall be shut down before making repairs or adjustments to a drill rig or

lubricating fittings (except repairs or adjustments that can only be made with the engine running). The operator shall remove keys and tag out the ignition. All systems (i.e., drill rotor, engine, pressurized lines, etc.) shall be at a “zero energy state” before performing maintenance.


12

• The leveling jacks shall be lowered, the wheels chocked, and the hand/parking brakes set before working under a drill rig.

Moving Drill Equipment

• Lower drilling mast before moving rig. • Secure all loads to rig prior to off-road mobilization. • Inspect the route of travel prior to moving the drill rig off-road. Be aware of holes, rocks,

trees, erosion, and uneven surfaces. • Remove all passengers from the cab before moving drill rig onto rough or sloped terrain. • Engage multiple drive power trains (when available) on rig vehicle when mobilizing off-road. • Travel directly up or down grade on slopes when feasible. Avoid off-camber traverse

approaches to drill sites. • Approach changes in grade squarely to avoid shifting loads or unexpected unweighting. • Use a spotter (person at grade) to provide guidance when vertical and lateral clearance is

questionable. • Use parking brake and chock wheels when grades are steep.

Raising the Derrick (Mast)

• Locate overhead utilities visually prior to raising the mast • Treat overhead electrical lines as if they were energized and maintain at least a 40-foot

clearance. • Contractors will contact appropriate utilities agency to manipulate and deactivate overhead

service in areas that interfere with drilling operations. Do not attempt to handle utilities. • Stabilize and level each work site prior to drill rig setup. Do not drill on slopes near power

lines, including drainage ditches, trenches, excavations, and other holes. • The derrick must not be raised until the rig has been blocked, leveled (leveling jacks down),

and chocked. • Secure and lock mast according to manufacturer’s recommendations prior to drilling. • If required to perform work on the mast at heights above six feet, a full body safety harness

and lanyard shall be work accordingly. • Note wind speed and direction to prevent overhead utility lines from contacting rig derrick.

Allow at least a 40-foot clearance between rig mast and utility lines, unless authorized by the COR Site HSE Representative to operate at a shorter clearance distance.

Drilling

• Follow the manufacturer’s operational or field manual’s safety guidelines/specifications. • Only authorized and trained drill rig operators shall operate a drill rig. Drill rigs shall be setup

and operated according to manufacturer’s specifications. • Set up and delineate appropriate work zones. This may include an exclusion zone,

contamination-reduction zone, and a support zone. When feasible, work zones shall be cleared of obstructions and leveled to provide a safe working area.

• Establish a communication system between driller, helpers, and other field support personnel for responsibilities during drilling operations.

• All personnel shall be instructed to “stand clear” prior to and during startup. Personnel shall stay as far away as possible from operating equipment, especially if a rig is located on unstable terrain (drilling operations shall not proceed on unstable ground).


13

• Begin auger borings slowly with the drive engine operating at low speed. • Keep hands and feet clear of rotating augers and direct push equipment. • Prevent placing hands or feet under auger sections during hoisting over hard surfaces. • Avoid the removal of spoil cuttings with hands or feet. • Assure drill rig is in neutral and the augers are not rotating before cleaning augers. • Wear hearing protection as required.

7.4 Excavation and Trenching The following factors are to be evaluated by a competent person and discussed before commencing excavation operations:

• Soil Structure: Excavations in wet soil, sandy soil, or areas that have been backfilled are relatively unstable and must be supported or sloped if employees are to enter the excavation.

• Weather Conditions: Changing weather conditions greatly affect the safety of working in and around excavations. Excess water from rain or snow loosens the soil, increasing the chance of the soil caving in. Excavation should be diked, pumped, or covered, to prevent an excessive amount of water from accumulating.

• Superimposed Loads: Superimposed loads in the vicinity of excavation walls increase the probability of a cave-in. Heavy equipment and materials should be kept back as far as possible. Heavy equipment should be placed on wooden mats or planking to spread the weight more evenly. Considerations must also be taken when buildings, curbs, trees, utility poles, and other structures are around the excavation. Excavated soil must be stored away from the edge of the excavation.

The following safe operating guidelines will apply to excavations exceeding 4 feet in depth.

• Prior to opening an excavation, all efforts shall be made to locate and mark all underground utilities.

• Trees, boulders, and other surface encumbrances that create a hazard will be removed or made safe before excavation is begun.

• Excavated materials will be stored and retained at least 3 feet from the edge of the excavation. Walkways and sidewalks shall be kept clear of excavated materials.

• Special precautions will be taken in sloping or shoring the sides of excavations adjacent to a previously backfilled excavation.

• Except in hard rock, excavations below the level of the base of the footing of any foundation or retaining wall will not be permitted unless the wall is underpinned and all other precautions have been taken to ensure the stability of the adjacent walls.

• Diversion ditches, dikes, or other suitable means will be used to prevent water from entering an excavation and for drainage of the excavation.

• When mobile equipment is used or allowed adjacent to excavations, stop logs or barricades will be installed. The grade will always be away from the excavation.

• Dust conditions during excavation will be kept to a minimum. Wetting agents shall be used upon the direction of the SSO (COR Site HSE Representative).

• Employees subjected to vehicle traffic in excavating operations shall don reflective clothing. Excavations shall be inspected by a competent person prior to employees entering the space.


14

• When employees are required to work in an excavation 4 feet or deeper, one or more ladders shall be provided for access/egress. Within the trench, the maximum horizontal travel distance to a ladder shall be no more than 25 feet. The ladder shall extend a minimum of 3 feet above the excavation and be secured. This ladder shall not be removed until all employees have exited the excavation. All ladders will meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.25.

• Excavations deeper than 5 feet which are entered by employees shall be sloped, shored, or supported by some other protective system prior to entering the space.

• Guardrail or fences shall be placed at all excavations which are close to sidewalks, drives, or other thoroughfares. Adequate protection shall also exist at remote excavations where workers are not present.

Protective Systems OSHA requires that all excavations more than 5 feet deep which will be entered by employees shall be shored, sheeted, braced, or supported.

• The preferred method is to slope the sides of the excavation to the angle of repose, or the angle of control at which the soil will remain at rest. The angle of repose varies with different kinds of soil; this angle must be determined on each individual excavation, using the following guidelines:

Maximum Allowable Slopes

Soil or Rock Type Horizontal to Vertical Ration (Slope) Degrees

Stable Rock Vertical 90

Type A ¾: 1 53

Type B 1:1 45

Type C 1 ½: 1 34

Notes: No soil classification is required if a 1 ½:1 slope (34-degree slope) is used. If a 1 ½:1 slope is not used, a soil classification must be made by a competent person. The excavation must then comply with the above minimum slope requirements.

• The second method of support is shoring, sheeting, tightly placed timber shores, bracing, trench jacks, piles, or other materials installed in a manner strong enough to resist the pressures surrounding the excavations.

• The third method is to use a trench box, which is a prefabricated movable trench shield made of steel plates, welded to a steel frame.

Hazardous Atmospheres When Contractors perform excavation operations in areas where a hazardous atmosphere could reasonably exist (e.g., landfill, hazardous storage areas, underground/aboveground storage tanks, etc) personnel will, at a minimum, apply these guidelines:


15

• Perform atmospheric testing in the anticipated breathing zone of the work area to determine oxygen content, combustible gas, and toxic gases and vapors, at a minimum, if applicable.

• Employees will not perform work in areas with less than 19.5% oxygen without the appropriate respiratory protection or adequate ventilation.

• Employees will not perform work in an area with greater than a 10% lower explosive limit (LEL) level.

• Toxic gases will be evaluated on a per-site basis using direct-reading instrumentation (DRI). Competent Person The SSO (COR Site HSE Representative) or designated alternate will serve as the site’s “competent person” for excavation operations. The designated competent person must meet the following qualifications:

• Has sufficient experience to identify existing and predictable hazards in the excavation surroundings, or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to employees, and

• Is a registered Professional Engineer (P.E.) in civil engineering, or • Has completed a minimum of 6 hours of training in excavation safety which includes the

following elements: o Soils classification and identification o Appropriate sloping/shoring methods o Shoring system types and construction o Operational safety practices o Inspection of excavations

The designated competent person will be responsible for:

• Performing a daily inspection of the excavation (to be documented on a Excavation Daily Inspection Checklist form)

• Overseeing excavation operations to ensure that they conform to the requirements of 29 CFR Subpart P.

7.5 Overhead Electrical Lines Operation of heavy equipment and cranes in areas with overhead power lines represents a significant hazard to all personnel on the job site. Accidental contact with an energized lines or arcing between a high power line and grounded equipment can cause electrocution of equipment operators or nearby ground personnel, and damage to power transmission and operating equipment. While maintaining a safe distance from all energized lines is the preferred means for control of this hazard, site conditions may not always accommodate this. If work will (or may) occur within 50 feet of any energized lines, the procedures outlined below will be observed.

• Overhead power lines will be identified on each job site before the work commences. For each identified line, the Project Manager must determine whether it is energized (and the operating voltage for energized lines), and whether work operations will require that activities with heavy equipment (excavators, loaders, cranes, etc) will occur within 50 feet of the line. Unless verified, it will be assumed that all lines will be energized.


16

Hazard Prevention Safe working distance is the minimum distance which must be maintained between any energized electrical line and any part of the operating equipment to maintain adequate safety margins, and is based on the line voltage of the power line. The following safe working distance criteria will be applied for all Operations:

Line Voltage Minimum Safe Working Distance

0-50 10 feet

>50 – 200 15 feet

>200 – 350 20 feet

>350 – 500 25 feet

>500 – 750 35 feet

>750 – 1000 45 feet

Notes: Source – American National Standards Institute, Publication B30.5

Where any work task will not allow the minimum safe working distance to be maintained at all times, an alternate means of protection must be identified and approved by the COR. In order of preference, acceptable procedures are:

• De-energize the power line(s) • Install insulated sleeves on power lines • Assign line spotters to assist the equipment operator

Elimination of electrical power provides the most acceptable means of ensuring safety of personnel. While temporary site power lines are under the control of the site manager (and can be de-energized locally), electrical distribution and transmission lines can be de-energized only by the owner of the line, (generally the local electrical utility). Therefore, de-energizing of a line requires the advance coordination with the line owner – generally at least one week advance notice should be provided. Insulating sleeves can be placed over power lines to provide a contact and arcing barrier if work must occur closer to the power lines than the accepted safe work distance. Although not as desirable as line de-energizing, the use of these sleeves can provide an acceptable alternative where electrical lines are required to remain in service. As with de-energizing of distribution and transmission lines, placement of insulating sleeves can be performed only be the line owner. This requires advance coordination with the line owner – generally at least one week advance notice should be provided. To install the sleeves, representatives of the line owner will require access to the job site. A line spotter is a person located at ground level who is assigned to observe equipment operations with the specific duty of assisting the equipment operator to ensure that no part of the equipment gets too close to an energized, unprotected electrical line. Persons assigned to act as line spotters must meet the following requirements:


17

• While acting as a spotter, no other duties may be performed (e.g., the line spotter cannot also act as the load spotter during a lifting operation)

• The spotter will have a radio or other direct means of communicating with the equipment operator at all times.

• The spotter will be positioned at a right angle to the equipment operator’s line of sight to maximize the sight angles between the personnel.

• Under no circumstances will any portion of a piece of equipment pass closer than 10 feet to an energized, un-insulated electrical line.

The following additional safety measures can be implemented as needed when working around energized power lines:

• Provide equipment with proximity warning devices – these provide an audible alarm if any part of the equipment gets too close to a line.

• Install ground safety stops – these prevent vehicles from accidentally entering hazardous areas.

• Equip cranes with a boom-cage guard – this prevents the boom from becoming energized if an electrical line is contacted.

• Utilize insulated links and polypropylene tag lines – these prevent transmission of electricity to loads or tag line handlers if an electrical line is contacted.

NOTE: These additional safeguards are intended as supplemental protection. Use of these measures is not permissible as a substitute for maintaining the safe working distance or implementation of the safety procedures.

Accident Response If an electrical power line is hit or an electrical arc occurs:

• All ground personnel must evacuate IMMEDIATELY to a distance of at least 50 feet. DO NOT attempt to rescue any injured person until the line can be de-energized.

• The operator should remain in the cab until the line can be de-energized, and carefully try to extricate the equipment from the power line. This may not be possible where melting of insulator material or metal has occurred.

• Contact the line owner to report the line contact and request that the line be de-energized immediately.

• Once the line has been confirmed to be de-energized, the operator can safely evacuate the cab and rescue can commence for any injured personnel.

• Contact the COR to report the incident and implement any instructions provided. If the operator must evacuate while the line is still energized (due to fire or other life-threatening condition) he/she should jump clear of the equipment (making SURE to avoid touching the equipment and the ground simultaneously), and land upright with feet together. Once on the ground, proceed in a direct line away from the equipment, using a short, shuffling gait (feet touching, sliding each foot no more than 1 foot forward at a time) to minimize shock hazard from electrical energy being transmitted through the ground. 7.6 Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work.


18

• Equipment will be used only for operations for which it is approved, and as recommended by the manufacturer.

• Workers assigned to operate or maintain oxygen/fuel-gas supply equipment and resistance welding equipment will be thoroughly instructed in the safe use of such equipment by a qualified person.

• Engineering controls will be implemented to control hot work hazards to the extent feasible. • Before cutting or welding is performed, the area will be inspected by the supervisor

responsible for authorizing hot work. When appropriate, a written Hot Work Permit will also be completed to designate specific approvals needed and precautions to be taken.

Storage and Handling of Compressed Gas Cylinders

• Compressed gas cylinders will be legibly marked with either the chemical or trade name of the gas. Such markings will be stenciled, stamped, or labeled and will not be easily removable.

• The marking will be located on the shoulder of the cylinder. • Compressed gas cylinders will be equipped with approved connections. • Acetylene cylinders will be stored and used valve end up. • Cylinders will not be stored near highly combustible/flammable materials, especially oil or

grease. • Cylinders will be stored in an upright and secure position with caps installed and separated

from fuel-gas cylinders or combustible materials (especially oil or grease), by a minimum distance of 20 feet, or by a noncombustible barrier of at least 5 feet high and having a fire resistance rating of at least one half hour.

• Cylinders will not be dropped, struck by objects, or permitted to strike each other violently. • Cylinder valves will be closed and gauges removed before moving cylinders. • Cylinder valves will be closed and gauges removed at the end of the shift or when work is

finished. • Valves of empty cylinders will be closed. • Cylinders will be kept far enough away from the actual welding/cutting operation so that

sparks, hot slag, or flames will not reach them. • Cylinder valves will always be opened slowly. • An acetylene cylinder valve will not be opened more than one and one-half turns of the valve

stem and preferable no more than three-fourths of a turn. • Where a special wrench is required to operate a cylinder valve, it will be left in position on

the stem of the valve when the cylinder is in use. In the case of manifolded or coupled cylinders, at least one such wrench will be available for immediate use.

• Regulators will be removed, valve caps in place, and valves closed when cylinders are transported by vehicles. All vehicles used to transport cylinders will have a proper support rack installed.

• A suitable cylinder truck, chain, or other steadying device will be used to prevent cylinders from being knocked over while in use or storage.

• Cylinders will not be placed where they may become part of an electrical circuit. Tapping of an electrode against a cylinder to strike an arc will be prohibited.

Eye and Face Protection Eye and face protection will comply with the following:


19

• Welding helmets and hand shields will be used during all arc welding/cutting operations, excluding submerged arc welding. Cutting/welding goggles will also be worn during arc welding/cutting operations. The goggles or glasses may be either clear or colored glass, depending on the type of exposure in welding operations. Helpers or attendants will wear proper eye protection.

• Safety goggles or other approved eye/face protection are for use during gas welding operations in light work, torch brazing, or inspection.

• All operators and attendance on resistance welding or brazing equipment will use face shields or goggles, depending on the particular job.

Protective Clothing Hot work will require the following protective clothing:

• Except when engaged in light work, all welders will wear flameproof gauntlet gloves. • Flameproof aprons made of leather, or other suitable material, may also be desirable for

protection against radiated heat and sparks. • Woolen clothing will be worn in preference to cotton because it is not so readily ignited.

Nylon clothing is not permitted for welding/cutting operations. All outer clothing, such as jumpers or overalls, will be reasonable free from oil or grease.

Fire Watch

• When required, a fire watch will be maintained for at least 30 minutes after completion of welding/cutting operations so that possible smoldering fire can be detected and extinguished.

• Firewatchers will have fire-extinguishing equipment readily available and be trained in its use.

• Firewatchers will be familiar with facilities and procedures in the event of a fire. They will watch for fires in all exposed areas and attempt to extinguish them only when obviously within the capacity of the equipment available. The COR’s Fire Department will be immediately notified of all fires.

7.7 Heavy Equipment Field operators that involve heavy equipment represent a significant hazard to ground workers as well as heavy equipment operators. Heavy equipment may cause serious injury or death as a result of a rollover, contact with ground personnel, and pinch points. All personnel working at or visiting a site where heavy equipment operations occur shall read and abide by the requirements of this procedure. Communications Communications between site supervisors/managers, heavy equipment operators, and other site personnel is a key method of preventing serious injury or death during heavy equipment operations. The following outline the communication requirements during heavy equipment operations:

• Site supervisors/managers shall ensure that all operators are notified/informed of when, where, and how many ground personnel will be working on the site.

• Site supervisors/managers shall inform ground personnel before changes are made in the locations of designated areas.

• If required to work near heavy equipment, ground personnel shall use industry standard hand signals to communicate with operators.


20

• Always maintain eye contact with operators to the greatest extent possible (always face equipment). Never approach equipment from a blind spot or angle.

• All heavy equipment shall be equipped with reverse warning devices (i.e., backup alarms) that can be significantly heard over equipment and other background noise. Reverse signaling lights shall be in working order.

• When feasible, two-way radios shall be used to verify the location of nearby ground personnel.

• When an operator cannot adequately survey the working or traveling zone, a guide shall use a standard set of hand signals to provide directions. Flags or other high visibility devices may be used to highlight these signals.

Clearance Ground clearance around heavy equipment may significantly reduce hazards posed during heavy equipment operations. The following outline the clearance requirements during heavy equipment operations:

• Ground personnel shall always yield to heavy equipment. • Ground personnel shall maintain approximately 100 feet of clearance from all active heavy

equipment, unless an approved, job-specific hazard analysis that identifies any special precautions is completed and communicated to the appropriate operators and ground personnel.

• Site supervisors/managers shall designate areas of heavy equipment operation and ensure that all ground personnel are aware of designated areas. Designated areas shall include boundaries and travel routes for heavy equipment. Travel routes shall be set up to reduce crossing of heavy equipment paths and to keep heavy equipment away from ground personnel.

• When feasible, site supervisors/managers shall set up physical barriers (e.g., caution tape, orange cones, and concrete jersey barriers) around designated areas and ensure that unauthorized ground personnel do not enter such areas.

• Operators shall stop work whenever unauthorized personnel or equipment enter the designated area and only resume when the area has been cleared.

• Operators shall only move equipment when aware of the location of all workers and when the travel path is clear.

• Ground personnel shall never stand between two pieces of heavy equipment or other objects (i.e., steel support beams, trees, buildings, etc.)

• Ground personnel shall never stand directly below heavy equipment located on higher ground.

• If working near heavy equipment, ground personnel shall stay out of the travel and swing areas (excavators, all-terrain forklifts, hoists, etc.) of all heavy equipment.

• Ground personnel shall never work near heavy equipment during times of inadequate lighting.

• Personnel shall keep all extremities, hair, tools, and loose clothing away from pinch points and other moving parts on heavy equipment.

Personal Protective Equipment At a minimum, all ground personnel and operators outside of heavy equipment shall wear the following:


21

• High visibility, reflective safety vest that is visible from all angles and made of fluorescent material and orange, white, or yellow reflective material (ensure that vest is not faded or covered with outer garments, dirt, etc.)

• ANSI-approved hard hat • ANSI-approved safety glasses with sideshields • ANSI-approved steel toe safety boots • Hearing protection as needed • Appropriate work uniform (i.e., full length jeans/trousers and a sleeved shirt; no tank, crew

tops or loose clothing permitted). Utilities When contacted by heavy equipment, aboveground and underground utilities may cause severe injuries or death as a result of electrocution, explosion, etc. The following outline the requirements while performing heavy equipment operations that may lead to contact with aboveground or underground utilities:

• Always be aware of surrounding utilities • Ensure all equipment (i.e., dump trailers, loaders, excavators, etc) is lowered prior to moving

underneath of aboveground utilities. • Ensure utilities are cleared and identified prior to beginning any earthwork moving operation.

Contact the local utility service providers for clearance prior to performing work. Training, Inspection, and Maintenance

• Only designated, qualified personnel shall operate heavy equipment. • Operators shall have all appropriate local, state, or federal licenses or training to operate a

designated piece of heavy equipment. • Operators shall be evaluated through documented experience (resume) and a practical

evaluation of skills (field tests). Operators shall be knowledgeable and competent in the operation of a designated piece of heavy equipment.

• All heavy equipment shall be inspected and, if necessary, repaired prior to use. Operators shall not operate heavy equipment that has not been cleared for use. All machinery and mechanized equipment will be certified to be in safe operating condition (certification form attached) by a competent individual seven days prior to on-site operation, and is valid for one year.

Operation

• All heavy equipment shall be operated in a safe manner that will not endanger persons or property.

• All heavy equipment shall be operated at safe speeds. • Always move heavy equipment up and down the face of a slope. Never more equipment

across the face of a slope. • Slow down and stay as far away as possible while operating near steep slopes, shoulders,

ditches, cuts, or excavations. • When feasible, operators shall travel with the “load trailing,” if the load obstructs the forward

view of the operator. • Slow down and sound horn when approaching a blind curve or intersection. Flagmen

equipped with 2-way radio communications may be required to adequately control traffic. • Operators shall remain in cab while heavy equipment is being loaded.


22

• Always keep heavy equipment in gear while in operation. Do not place in neutral. • All heavy equipment shall be shut down prior to and during fueling. Do not smoke or use

electrical devices while fueling. Fuel shall not be carried in or on heavy equipment, except in permanent fuel tanks or approved safety cans.

• Turn off heavy equipment, place gear in neutral, and set parking brake prior to leaving vehicle unattended. Also, place buckets and blades on the ground and place hydraulic gear in neutral. Heavy equipment parked on slopes shall have the wheels chocked.

• Never jump on to or off a piece of heavy equipment. • Never exit heavy equipment while it is in motion. • Passengers shall only ride in heavy equipment designed for occupancy of passengers. • Never ride on the outside of a piece of heavy equipment (e.g., tailgates, buckets, steps, etc.). • Site vehicles must be parked in a safe place away from heavy equipment. • Operators shall never push/pull “stuck” or “broken-down” equipment unless a spotter

determines that the area is cleared of all personnel around and underneath the equipment. • Operators shall wear seatbelts at all times while operating heavy equipment. • If designated for work in contaminated areas/zones, equipment shall be kept in the exclusion

zone until work or the shift has been completed. Equipment will be decontaminated within designated decontamination areas.

• Equipment left unattended at night adjacent to traveled roadways shall have appropriate lights or reflectors, or barricades equipped with appropriate lights or reflectors, to identify the location of that equipment, and shall not be closer than 6 feet (or the regulatory requirement for the work location) to the active roadway.

• Pneumatic-tired earthmoving haulage equipment, with a maximum speed exceeding 15 miles per hour, shall be equipped with fenders on all wheels.

• Lift trucks shall have the rated capacity clearly posted on the vehicle, and the ratings are not exceeded.

• Steering or spinner knobs shall not be attached to steering wheels. • High lift rider industrial trucks shall be equipped with overhead guards. • When ascending or descending grades in excess of 5%, loaded trucks shall be driven with the

load upgrade. • All belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, sprockets, spindles, drums, flywheels, chains, or other

reciprocating, rotating or moving parts of equipment shall be guarded when exposed to contact by persons or when they otherwise create a hazard.

• All hot surfaces of equipment, including exhaust pipes or other lines, shall be guarded or insulated to prevent injury and fire.

• All equipment having a charging skip shall be provided with guards on both sides and open end of the skip area to prevent persons from walking under the skip while it is elevated.

• Platforms, footwalks, steps, handholds, guardrails, and toeboards shall be designed, constructed, and installed on machinery and equipment to provide safe footing and access ways.

• Substantial overhead protection shall be provided for the operators of fork lifts and similar equipment.


23

7.8 Traffic/Pedestrian Safety The following requirements can be implemented for simple work operations occurring on or near roadways. The Contractor will utilize flagmen during activities that require work in local streets and/or schools/pedestrian crossings.

• Use of Signs and Cones to Direct Traffic: Traffic signs and cones are used to direct traffic away from and around personnel. Cones and signs are effective only if they give oncoming drivers enough time to react and make it clear how traffic should react.

• Signs and Traffic Control Devices: Signs are required in addition to cones in almost all traffic control situations.

• “Road Work Ahead” or “Men Working” are the basic warning signs. They are orange, a minimum of 48"x 48" square, and equipped with a self-supporting base. In general, advanced signs should be placed well ahead of the cone taper to warn traffic of the upcoming controls. If required by law, they can be placed on the roadside in advance of the cone taper.

• Directional Arrow signs should be placed ahead of the cone taper to clearly indicate which direction traffic should flow.

• Warning Flags are often put in cones at the leading edge of a taper to make the taper more prominent. They have no legal status and are not recommended. Use a “Road Work Ahead” sign instead.

• Additional protection will be provided by City of Richmond Police in high-traffic areas to include residential areas and pedestrian crossings. In addition, work activities by Contractor will not restrict emergency vehicle access (e.g., Police, fire department, ambulance, etc.)

7.9 Flammable and Combustible Materials

• Storage containers in storage racks are to be stored a minimum of 50 feet from the nearest structure. All containers are to be electrically grounded. Drip trays are to be provided under container spigots.

• When transferring a flammable/combustible liquid an electrical bond (metal-to-metal) is to be established between the two transfer containers prior to transfer. Storage containers are to be equipped with an approved safety faucet and flexible metal hose. A pressure-vacuum relief vent is required for containers of flammable liquids. Metal-to-metal contact may also be established by using a grounding strap.

• Spill containment is required for all solvent dispensing areas. The secondary containment dike will be designed for 110 percent of the maximum stored solvent volume, with the capacity for 24-hour holding time.

• The maximum amount of flammable solvent (used for cleaning purposes) at any workstation is limited to one quart. Variance from this requirement requires the prior approval of the COR.

• Maximum use must be made of fireproof metal cabinets to store flammable liquids inside any structure.

• Rags, kimwipes, etc., that are contaminated with flammable liquids are to be placed in a safety container equipped with a fusible link lid.

• All containers of flammable liquids must be properly identified as to contents. • All manually handled flammable liquids shall be handled in approved safety containers. The

exception is pint-sized squirt bottles.


24

• Where flammable solvents must be used in wash containers, such as for paint sprayer cleaning, the container must be provided with a self-closing or fusible lid.

• Flammable liquid in portable containers in excess of the amount required for one day of use must be stored in approved flammable liquid storage cabinets.

• Flammable storage cabinets will be kept closed, and will be latched each time after use. • “NO SMOKING” signs are to be posted in areas where flammable liquids are stored,

dispensed, or used. • An adequate supply of fire extinguishers will be located to support each area where

flammable or combustible liquids are handled or stored. Additional information and requirements for handling and storage of specific flammable liquids are detailed in Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), which must be obtained and maintained on site for each solvent in use. 7.10 Compressed Gases Compressed air or other compressed gases in operating pressures exceeding 10 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) are not to be used to blow dirt, chips, or dust from clothing while it is being worn. Compressed air for other types of cleaning (other than clothing/personnel) is limited to 30 psig. The use of blown compressed air is to be controlled, and proper personal protection equipment or safeguards utilized, to protect against the possibility of eye injury to the operator or other persons. Compressed air or gases are not to be used to empty containers of liquids in cases where the operating pressure can exceed the safe working pressure of the container. Compressed gases are not to be used to elevate or otherwise transfer any hazardous substance from one container to another unless the containers are designed to withstand the operating gas pressure with a safety factor of at least four. Compressed Gases (Cylinders)

• Cylinders are not to be used unless they bear Department of Transportation (DOT) markings showing that they have been tested as required by DOT regulations.

• Cylinders must never be dropped, struck, or permitted to strike each other violently. Cylinders may be moved by tilting and rolling them on their bottom edges.

• Valve protection caps must always be kept on cylinders when they are being moved or stored, and until ready for use.

• Cylinder valves are to be kept closed except when gas is being used or when connected to a permanent manifold. Valves of empty cylinders must be closed.

• Cylinders must never be used as rollers or supports, or for any purpose other than carrying gas.

• Cylinders of compressed gas shall be stored in areas where they are protected from external heat sources such as flame impingement, intense radiant heat, electrical arc, or high-temperature steam lines.


25

• Cylinders are to be stored in an assigned area, with full and empty cylinders stored separately. Stored fuel gases and oxygen cylinders are to be separated by at least 20 feet, or by a fire wall of at least 5 feet high that has a fire-resistance rating of at least ½ hour.

• Oxygen, nitrogen, helium, or freon cylinders may be stored or transported either in an upright or horizontal position. Acetylene cylinders must always be kept in an upright position. All horizontally placed cylinders are to be secured by chocks or ties to prevent rolling.

• Cylinders are to be secured to a fixed object by chain or equivalent fastening device whenever they are placed in an upright position. The protective cap is not to be removed or the cylinder valve opened until the cylinder is secured.

• Repair of leaks must never be attempted on a pressurized system. System pressure should be reduced to atmospheric pressure as rapidly as possible, and the supervisor notified immediately.

• Compressed gas cylinders must be legible marked for the purpose of identifying the gas content with either the chemical or trade name of the gas. Such marking is to be by means of stenciling, stamping, or labeling, and must not be readily removable. Whenever practical, the marking is to be located on the shoulder of the cylinder. Positive identification of the gas in any cylinder is required before connecting cylinders for use.

• Compressed gas cylinders in portable service are to be conveyed by suitable trucks, to which they are securely fastened. All gas cylinders in service must be securely held in substantial racks or secured to other rigid structures so that they will not fall or be knocked over.

• Gas cylinders moved by hoist must be handled in suitable cradles or skip boxes. Any slings used for this purpose must be specifically designed for that cylinder handling.

• Cylinders must not be placed where they might form part of an electrical circuit. • Transfer of acetylene from one cylinder to another or mixing of gases in a cylinder is

prohibited. • Oxygen cylinders are never to be stored near:

o highly combustible materials, especially oil and grease; o reserve stocks of acetylene or other fuel gas cylinders; or o any other substance likely to cause or accelerate fire.

• Compressed oxygen is never to be used: o as breathing air; o to purge pipelines, tanks, or any confined area; o to supply a head-pressure tank; o in pneumatic tools; o in oil preheating burners; o to start internal combustion engines; o for ventilation; o for cleaning clothing; or o in any other way as a substitute for compressed air.

7.11 Underground Work A mandated pre-job meeting will be held prior to the start of the underground work. Participants include all interested parties such as state representatives, COR Management, Contractors, and fire and law enforcement representatives. The pre-job meeting subject items will include all of the following facets of the work:


26

• Personnel requirements • Ventilation • Excavation • Ground support • Diesel engine operation • Emergency plans • Codes of safe practices • Rescue crew and first aid procedures • Protective equipment requirements • Underground communication systems • Fire prevention and control • Explosives safety (if used) • Dust control • Transportation and haulage • Electrical equipment • Lighting requirements • Laser safety • Occupational exposure sampling.

General Safety

• The Contractor Site Supervisor will ensure than every reasonable effort is taken for the safety and health of employees, whether or not specified in this procedure.

• Fence, cover, over or otherwise safeguard to control unauthorized entry underground. • At least one designated employee must be on outside duty when anyone is working

underground. • A check-in/check-out procedure will be provided at the surface that will ensure those

aboveground can accurately determine and identify those underground. • Unnecessary accumulations of water, muck, timber rails, and similar materials will be

avoided underground. • Gunite, shotcrete, and pump crete lines will be secured to prevent uncoupling of sections

under pressure. • Air hose (¾ inch or larger) requires a safety device (whip check) to prevent the hose or line

from whipping if disconnected under pressure. • Inform oncoming shift of any hazardous occurrences or conditions. • Any buried air, fuel, or utility line requires a “buried line” caution sign. Overhead utility lines

should be marked also to prevent accidental contact. All employees involved with underground work will be instructed in hazard recognition and measures to take to eliminate the hazards including:

• Air monitoring and ventilation • Illumination • Communications • Flood control • Personal protective equipment • Emergency procedures, including evacuation plans


27

• Check-in/Check-out procedures • Explosives • Fire prevention and protection • Mechanical equipment

7.12 Poisonous Plants, Insects and Animals Indigenous to Virginia Plants

• Giant Hogweed can be identified by it height, the size of the leaves and its flower clusters. It grows to be approximately 15 feet tall with leaves spanning 2-5 feet. It has a thick green stem with purple areas and hairy flower stakes. A combination of contact with the sap from this plant and exposure to the sun can cause painful burning blisters within 24 to 48 hours. It can also cause purple and black painful scares.

• Blue-Green Algae technically know as cyanobacteria, are naturally occurring and found in lakes and streams. The algae become very abundant in warm in undisturbed waters. Exposure to the algae in small quantities over a long period of time or large quantities of a short period for time can cause liver damage and/or damage to the nervous systems.

• Poison Ivy or Poison oak grows in a vine or a shrub formation. The tissues of these plants contain poisonous oil which is irritating to the skin. The leaf formation is two leaves on the side and one down in the middle. The edge of the leave have varying amounts of notches. In the spring the poison ivy is a red color. Later in the spring they become a shinny green. In autumn the leaves turn yellow, red, and orange. Small greenish flowers grow in bunches close to the leaf joins, later in the season berries form that are whitish and waxy looking. Wash the area several times with soap water if exposure is confirmed. If blisters, redness, and/or itchiness develop, treat with calamine lotion, Epsom salts, or bicarbonate of soda.

Poisonous Insects and Animals

• Fleas, mites, and chiggers are not poisonous but can cause skin irritation. Symptoms of a bite may include small, raised lesions, pain or itching, inflammation of the skin, allergic-type reactions in people that are hypersensitive. Clean the affected area with soap and water. Call a physician if the pain or itching persistent or there are signs of infection, and/or if you have a fever.

• Tick bites can have similar skin irritations as the fleas, mites and chigger bite but can also carry Lyme Disease. The following are symptoms of Lyme Disease: a rash at the site of the bite, have flu like symptoms, fever, headache, nausea, jaw pain, sensitivity to light, red eyes, muscle aches and/or a stiff neck. See your doctor immediately.

• Black and Yellow Argiope female spider spins its web in a circle. The male will spin a smaller web with a zigzag pattern. The female grows to be inch and a half long. The male grows to be ¾ inch long. The spider has a small front body section with silver hairs on it. The abdomen (large back section) is egg shaped with black and yellow coloring. The spider lives in fields and gardens in shrubs, tall plants and flowers.

• Black Widow Spiders are a venomous spider. It injects a small amount of poison when it bites. Reports indicate the human mortality rate is less 1%. The female Black Widow is shiny black, usually with a reddish hourglass shape on the underside of her spherical abdomen. Her body is about .5 inches long, 1.5 inches when the legs are spread. Adult males are harmless to humans, about half the female's size, with smaller bodies, and longer legs and


28

usually have yellow and red bands and spots over the back as do the immature stages. Their webs are erratic in appearance, and the silk is stronger than almost all other spiders.

• Brown Widow Spider is not as dangerous as some other widow spiders because the Brown Widow Spider is less likely to bite someone and injects less poison.

• Fire Ants can inflict painful stings. The ant mounds are found in warm, sunny locations such as landscape beds, lawns, around trees and shrubs, along sidewalk cracks and against buildings. If disturbed, theses ants are generally aggressive and can inflict painful stings.

• Timber Rattlesnakes are venomous snakes. They measure from 3-3.5 feet or more in length. Two color patterns are commonly found: a yellow phase, which has black or dark brown crossbands on a lighter background color of yellow, brown or gray, and a black phase, which has dark crossbands on a dark background. Scales are ridged, giving this rattlesnake a rough-skinned appearance. The timber rattler has a broadly triangular head with many small scales on the crown of the head bordered by a few large scales.

• Northern Copperheads are venomous snakes. Northern Copperheads are medium-sized snakes. Adults typically range in length from 26 to 42 inches. The distinctive feature is the copper or bronze-colored top and sides of the head. This species also uses camouflage, in the form of tan, brown and rust-colored bands that allow the copperhead to disappear easily into dried up, fallen leaves, sticks and limbs.

• Eastern Cottonmouths are venomous snakes. Cottonmouths or water moccasins are common residents of southeastern swamps; however, they can be found in almost any wetland within their range. This species is highly variable in coloration, but is usually plain brown or olive with darker blotches or bands. These snakes average 3 to 31/2 feet long and are very stout-bodied. Cottonmouths have a reputation for being vicious and aggressive. When confronted cottonmouths will often stand their ground and not retreat.

8.0 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION Contractors, who plan to use respirators as a part of their work operations, are required to forward to the COR and Site/Project Management a copy of their written Respiratory Protection Program. Refer to 29 CFR 1910.134 for requirements of this OSHA standard. 9.0 HSE SURVEYS Site/Project Management and the COR HSE Department may conduct periodic HSE surveys of the site. There will be an interval of self-inspections conducted every two weeks with documentation of results sent to the Site/Project management. Any HSE discrepancy observed shall be reported to the appropriate Contractor representative for immediate correction. These HSE surveys do not relieve Contractors of their responsibility to self-inspect their work at a minimum of every two weeks and document audit results with appropriate corrective action(s) with copies and communication sent to COR officials and equipment and to conduct their work in a safe and environmentally compliant manner.


29

10.0 PLANNING AND OBSERVATION PROCEDURES In order to achieve the COR’s goal of Zero Incidents, the following shall be implemented by the Contractor. The SPA, the TSA, and the SOR process require each worker to receive on-the-job training from their direct Supervisor. Contractor employees shall also be trained and educated on their individual responsibilities contained in these tools by the Contractor after mobilization. 10.1 Safe Plan of Action: The Safe Plan of Action (SPA) is developed by the crew assigned to perform

the work with guidance from their Supervisor. The Supervisor identifies the work area and task to be performed and then leads the crew in developing a Safe Plan of Action.

Creating the SPA requires the Supervisor to solicit crew participation in identifying hazards and hazard control measures such as PPE, training requirement, permits, procedures, etc.

Members of the team are required to review and sign the SPA document on a daily basis to indicate their participation, their understanding of the plan, and their agreement to follow the plan.

10.2 Task Safety Awareness: The Task Safety Awareness (TSA) meeting is a daily HSE briefing

associated with the task(s) that are scheduled for the crew during the work shift.

These meetings generally take from two to ten minutes and address the HSE measures specific to the tasks.

TSA meetings shall be conducted at least daily and whenever a task presents a change of hazards from the previous tasks.

10.3 Safety Observation Reports: The Safety Observation Report (SOR), is a proactive process

designed to identify and document HSE-related acts and conditions in the work environment. All Contractor’s supervisors are required to participate in the SOR process by generating written SORs and turning them in to the COR Site/Project Management at least weekly.

The SOR allows any site worker to record observed proper or improper HSE practices and identifies the cause of any deficiencies so that corrective action can be taken.

11.0 ACCIDENT/INCIDENT INVESTIGATION A formal accident investigation must be conducted when an accident occurs, including non-injury incidents, most first-aid type accidents, and environmental releases or spills. 11.1 In the event of a workplace accident, injury, or illness, the most important immediate actions are

to provide medical assistance to those who may need it and to ensure the safety of others that may be affected or acting as emergency responders.


30

11.2 Securing the accident scene is essential to ensure an effective accident investigation. No materials or equipment shall be moved made until a review of the accident is completed, except when securing equipment or materials that could result in further injury.

11.3 Obtain witnesses’ names, permanent addresses, and signed statements of their complete factual

observations. 11.4 All accident investigations must be documented using the Accident Investigation Report. All

required reports should be completed and copies provided within 24 hours to the COR Site/Project Manager.

12.0 DRUGS, ALCOHOL, AND CONTRABAND The COR strictly prohibits the use, sale, attempted sale, manufacture, possession, distribution, cultivation, transfer, or dispensing of any illicit substance. This includes the use or possession of prescription medications without a valid prescription. Contractors shall implement a Drug, Alcohol, and Contraband Policy, including post incident testing, which meets the requirements of the COR’s policy. Key elements of the COR’s policy, except where prohibited by law, are:

• Pre-access/Pre-assignment testing current to within six months prior to initial assignment to work on the COR’s project.

• Post-incident testing of any worker involved in a project-related workplace incident that results, or could have resulted, in injury to any person requiring medical treatment beyond first aid, any type of medical attention given by a third-party medical services provider (hospital, clinic, doctor, etc.), a motor vehicle incident, or property damage.

• Post-incident testing must be conducted as soon as possible after the incident occurs.

• Reasonable suspicion testing upon reasonable suspicion by COR or Contractor management that a worker is under the influence of a prohibited substance. In such cases, worker(s) shall be immediately removed from the project and surrender their project credentials. Personnel so removed may only be allowed to return with a negative test result and written permission of the COR.

• Periodic random or unannounced testing for workers randomly selected or chosen by job classification or worksite. The percentage of the workforce, or the number of workers, selected for testing shall be specified on a project specific basis and stated in the project’s Hazard Assessment Safety Action Plan.

• Possession or use of alcohol in a COR-, client-, or Contractor-provided vehicle is prohibited.


31

• Any worker whose drug or alcohol test is positive will be removed from the project and required to surrender their project credentials.

• Refusal to submit to drug or alcohol testing, or attempts to tamper with, adulterate, dilute, or

otherwise tamper with a test sample will be treated the same as a positive test result.

• Contractor shall adopt collection, chain-of-custody, and other related procedures consistent with sound industry practice.

• The owner’s (client’s) drug and alcohol testing requirements may be more stringent than the COR

minimums. If so, the owner’s requirements shall be enforced.

• If the COR suspects that a worker is in possession of illegal drugs, alcohol, or contraband, the COR may request the individual to submit to a search of his or her person, personal effects, vehicles, lockers, and baggage. The COR may also conduct random searches of individuals entering or leaving the work site.

• Any suspected contraband will be confiscated and may be turned over to law enforcement, as

appropriate. If an individual is asked to submit to a search and refuses, that individual will be considered insubordinate, will surrender their project credentials, will be escorted off the job, and will not be allowed to return.

• COR shall have the right to review the Contractor’s Drug, Alcohol, and Contraband Policy and to

audit the Contractor’s implementation of their program at the jobsite.

• Contractors shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local alcohol and drug-related laws and regulations.

13.0 MEDICAL AND EXPOSURE MONITORING Contractors involved with operations, such as those involving hazardous waste, asbestos or lead abatement, certain carcinogenic compounds, etc., shall describe their medical and exposure monitoring procedures and their proposed compliance methods in their HSE Action Plan or HASP. Employees involved in these operations shall have met, prior to any fieldwork activity or exposure, the medical requirements of applicable regulations or standards, including, but not limited to, a baseline medical exam and periodic update exams, as required. Employee medical requirements and limitations shall be considered prior to the use of certain types of PPE, such as respirators. 14.0 IMMINENT DANGER SITUATIONS Upon discovery of any situation that may, in the opinion of the COR, reasonably be expected to cause serious physical harm, illness, death, or significant environmental damage, the Contractor Site/Project


32

Management or HSE representative shall suspend the related work immediately. Work may resume only after the HSE concern(s) have been corrected, to the satisfaction of the COR. Examples of “imminent danger” situations may include, but are not limited to the following:

• Visual observations of contamination, waste, etc. in a non-HAZWOPER work area

• Falls from elevations

• Excavations not properly sloped or shored

• Electrocution hazards

• Work activities posing injury hazards to the general public

• Operation of vehicles, machinery or heavy equipment in an unsafe manner

• Improper Lock Out/Tag Out procedures

In addition to the immediate suspension of work, the procedure for correction of imminent danger situations follows the “HSE Adherence Policy” set forth below. If site personnel are required to evacuate the area, personnel will exit through designated emergency routes and gather in a designated area for a head count, etc. 15.0 HSE ADHERENCE POLICY Contractors are required to comply with the applicable HSE requirements and regulations. The procedures below outline a three-step, progressively administered system to correct compliance problems. However, if in the opinion of the COR, non-compliance issues are considered to be severe, Contractors’ contracts may be terminated at any time. 15.1 Action Level One: If a Contractor fails to comply with an applicable HSE standard, Site/Project

Management will issue a written “Notice of HSE Non-Compliance” to the Contractor’s site representative. Site/Project Management will also forward a “Warning Letter for HSE Non-Compliance” and a copy of the Notice of HSE Non-Compliance to the Contractor’s President or Operations Manager.

15.2 Action Level Two: If item(s) of HSE non-compliance are not corrected by Action Level One, or

if the Contractor repeatedly fails to comply with the applicable HSE regulations, the COR Site HSE Representative will issue a “Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension” to the Contractor. The Contractor’s work may not resume until the COR Site HSE Representative and the Contractor’s Division Manager or equivalent have met and the Contractor has proposed corrective actions that are acceptable to the COR. Actions that may be considered include, but are not limited to:

• Removal of certain Contractor personnel from the project,

• Alteration of the Contractor’s job procedures, or

• Implementation of corrective action by the COR with back charges to the Contractor.


33

The Contractor shall not resume work until the COR's Site HSE Representative accepts the proposed corrective actions. COR Site HSE Representative will document and keep on file the meeting results in the form of meeting minutes.

15.3 Action Level Three: If Action Levels One and Two do not result in the Contractor’s HSE

performance being brought into compliance, contract termination may result. COR may terminate the contract after verifying with the COR Site HSE Representative that the HSE adherence procedure has not been followed and after giving the Contractor applicable notice. Contractors that have a contract terminated in accordance with this procedure are ineligible to participate in future COR projects until they have implemented and demonstrated corrective actions to improve their deficiencies.

Richmond Area Hospital Map

A. HCA Virginia-Richmond Hospitals: Retreat Hospital - www.retreathospital.com - (804) 254-5100

B. Bon Secours Richmond Comm Hospital - www.bonsecours.com - (804) 225-1700

C. Healthsouth Rehabilitation Hospital of Virginia - www.healthsouth.com - (804) 288-5700

D. HCA Virginia-Richmond Hospitals: Henrico Doctors' Hospital-Parham - www.henricodoctorshospital.com - (804) 747-5600

E. St. Mary's Hospital of Richmond - www.bonsecours.com - (804) 285-2011

F. VCU Massey Cancer Center - www.massey.vcu.edu - (804) 828-0450

G. MCV Hospitals and Physicians at Virginia Commonwealth University - www.richmond.k12.va.us - (804) 828-3129

H. HCA Virginia-Richmond Hospitals: CJW Medical Center-Chippenham - www.cjwmedical.com - (804) 320-3911

I. Henrico Doctors Hospital - www.henricodoctorshospital.com - (804) 287-4340

J. MCV Hospitals & Physicians at Virginia Commonwealth University H - www.vcu.edu - (804) 828-4204

EXHIBIT – C

Manhole Inspection Form

City of Richmond, VA Department of Public Utilities - Manhole Inspection Form

Initials:

Time:

Date:

Street Name/#:

City:

Location Details:

MH #:

Outgoing Invert to Rim (ft):

Rim to Grade (in):

Image Ref:

Insert Installed

Plastic

MetalNoneOther _________

Cover TypeSolidVented SlotsInner CoverGasketedBoltedLocking

ConditionSoundCrackedCorroded/PittedBolts MissingBrokenMissing

Insert Condition

SoundPoor FitLeakingInsert FellCracked/Torn/Holes

Pick Holes

<1/2" 2"

1" >2"

1 1/2"

Observations

Subject to Sheet Flow? Evidence of Surcharge? Surcharge?Evidence of Ponding around MH?

Diameter (in):

Offset from MH (in):

Height Condition

CoatedSoundCorroded/Pitted/WornCracked

Broken Missing

Material

Cast Iron

Other

Frame Seal

SoundCrackedLoose/Not AttachedOffset

Type:SolidAdjustable

Type:

Concentric

Eccentric

Flat Top

Remarks:

FitGood

Rocks/Wobbles

Oversized

Undersized

Minimum Diam.:

Drainage Area:

Cert. #:

Video Ref:

LocationAlleyEasement/Right of WayHighway

Residential StreetParking LotSidewalk Other _________________

MH Surface TypeAsphaltConcrete CollarConcrete PavementGrass/DirtGravel Other_________________

Inspection StatusSurface No AccessDescent Not Found

Not OpenedRemoteBurried and MarkedSurcharge/Debris

Traffic

Elevation:

CoordinateSystem:

Northing:

Easting: Accuracy of GIS:

#

Clear Opening (in):

Material:

BlockBrickParged OverPoured-in-PlacePrecastShotcreteUnknownOther_____________

Weather

Damp Light RainDry SaturatedHeavy Rain Very Dry

GIS

COVER/LID

FRAME

PAV.

ADJ.

RING

CHIMNEY

1

4

4

3

12

45

33

5

1345

134 5

31

1345

Height

Condition

SoundPoor InstallationCrackedLeakingBrokenCorroded/Pitted/Worn

3

45

3

11

Coating:

Yes No

Page 1 of 2

nshah

Text Box

Exhibit C

# of Steps:

Condition:

Corroded

Missing

#:

#:

Material:

AluminumBrickCast IronRubber/PlasticUnknown

Present:

Yes No Partial

Material:BrickConcreteConcrete/VCP1/2 PipeHDPELiningParged OverPrecastPVC 1/2 PipeVCP 1/2 PipeUnknownOther___________

Type:Formed

Insert

Pipe

Precast

Installed:

Yes

No

Exposure:

FullyOpen

PartiallyOpen

Closed

Material:Block

Brick

Parged Over

Poured-in-Place

Precast

Shotcrete

Unknown

Other ______________

Shape:Size:Material:Clock Position:Rim to Invert (ft):

Seal Condition:I/I:

Effluent - 6 Influent Influent InfluentDescription

S- Sound (1) C- Cracked (2) H- Hole (3) T- Stain (2) W- Weeper (2) D- Dripper (3) R - Runner (4) G- Gusher (5)

Diameter (in):

CONNECTING PIPE(S)

Pipe Special Cond:OU - Outside Drop Upper IU - Inside Drop Upper OL - Outside Drop Lower IL - Inside Drop LowerGR - Gravity Relief Connection LB - Lateral to Bldg (Service Line) FM - Force Main

Material:

BlockBrickParged OverPoured-in-PlacePrecastShotcreteUnknownOther_____________

Type:

ConcentricEccentricFlat Top

2

4

Material:

Block

Brick

Parged Over

Poured-in-PlacePrecastShotcreteUnknownOther _______________

1 - Sound

2 - Surface Spalling

3 - Hole

3 - Agg. Visible

3 - Joint Offset

3 - Cracked

4 - Joint Separated

4 - Fracture

4 - Broken

4 - Holes (multiple)

4 - Mortar Missing

4 - Cracks (multiple)

5 - Soil/Void Visible

Chimne Cone Wall Bench Channel

Condition:

1 - None

2 - Stains

4 - I/I Visible

2 - Weeper

3 - Dripper

4 - Runner

5 - Gusher


Evidence of Leakage:

Frame

2 - Fine

3 - Tap

4 - Medium

5 - Ball


Evidence of Roots:

Frame

CONE WALL BENCH CHANNEL

Remarks:

Influent

Observations:

DebrisGrease

STEPSCoating:

Yes No

Coating:

Yes No

Coating:

Yes No

Page 2 of 2

nshah

Text Box

Exhibit C

EXHIBIT – D

Smoke Testing Form

Street Name and Nearest Intersection:

ResidentialCommericalIndustrial

Property Address:Findings:Smoke from roof vents? Yes / No (circle one)

Smoke from roof leader(s) Yes / No (circle one) Estimated rate of smoke:low

LR CR RR medium high

Manhole No. that smoke is introduced into:

Approximate Length of Tested Sewer (ft)

City of Richmond, Virginia

Department of Public Utilities

Lot/Block Number:

Name of Contractor:

Weather:

Smoke Testing Form

Date Time

Basin ID:

Name of Crew Conducting Test:

Type of Neighborhood:

Other

Top View of House or BuildingL=Left, R=Right, C=Center,

F=Front, R=Rear

RF CF RF

Smoke from clean-out Yes/No (circle one) Estimated rate of smoke:lowmedium high

Smoke from sub-surface drain Estimated rate of smoke:low

Catch-Basin medium Area Drain highFoundation DrainOther

Smoke from Manhole Yes / No (circle one) Manhole ID Number:

Estimated rate of smoke:lowmedium high

Smoke from ground above pipe Yes / No (circle one) Estimated rate of smoke:

lowmedium high

Other smoke locations observed Yes / No (circle one) Estimated rate of smoke:Location/source of inflow:

lowmedium high

Remarks (Please provide recommendation for removing or more accurately identifying inflow source):

Approximate location of leak:

Exhibit D

EXHIBIT – E

Dyed Water Testing Form

ResidentialCommercialIndustrial

Roof Leaders Sub-Surface

LR CR RR Area Drain

LF CF LR Driveway Drain

Other Other Other Foundation Drain

Other

Department of Public Utilities

Dye Introduction Location:

Date

Weather:

Property Address:

Type of Property:

Dyed-Water Testing Form

Basin ID:

Lot/Block Number:

Time

Name of Crew Conducting Test:

City of Richmond, Virginia

Sump PumpLR CR RR

Catch Basin

Other

Flooded Dyed-Water Test

Storm MH ID

RF CF RF Other

Findings (Dye observation location):

Sanitary Manhole Sanitary MH ID

Storm Manhole Storm MH ID

Other Other

Roof Surface Area (sf):If Area Dain tests positive, provide type of Surface Cover and approximate Drainage Area (sf):

Remarks (Please provide recommendation for removing inflow source):

Estimated Inflow Rate (gpm) (Use table in Section 02654):

Top View of House or Building

L=Left, R=Right, C=Center, F=Front,

R=Rear

Exhibit E